JP7063850B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

The conventional gaming machine can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and when the variable display is executed, the display period for displaying the variable display result (variable display result) is set. Some are provided (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-149189

However, Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is not possible to improve the game entertainment during the display period of the variable display result.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest of the display period of the variable display result.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage,
The probability of being controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of 1 is the same as that of the normal state, and the frequency of establishment of the variable display execution condition can be controlled to a special state higher than that of the normal state. A game control means that can control the progress and transmit information about the game,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled in an advantageous state based on the information received from the game control means.
Equipped with
The game control means is
It is possible to determine whether or not each of the reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is controlled in an advantageous state.
The special state can be controlled over the variable display of the first number of times and the variable display of the second number of times more than the first number of times.
Information that can specify the end of the variable display of the first number of times when the variable display of the first number of times is completed in the special state controlled over the second number of times, and the end of the other variable display. It is possible to send the dedicated variable display end information that is not sent in
The effect executing means is
After receiving the dedicated variable display end information or the final variable display end information that can specify the end of the final variable display in the special state from the game control means, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed.
The pre-reading notice effect is not executed in the first pattern in which the variable display result of the final variable display is displayed and in the display period in which the variable display result of the final variable display is displayed. , The second pattern to be executed in the variable display executed based on the hold storage determined to be controlled in an advantageous state by the game control means.
It is characterized by that.
Further , the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state or a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means (for example, start winning command buffer 098SG194A) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
It is possible to control the progress of the game to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-predetermined period (for example, a normal state) over a predetermined number of times (for example, 7 times) of variable display. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling and transmitting information about the game (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 10-3).
Includes a look-ahead notice effect (eg, first meteor effect and stock effect) suggesting that the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled in an advantageous state based on the information received from the game control means. An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect,
Equipped with
The effect executing means reads ahead based on receiving variable display end information (for example, a symbol confirmation 2 command or a symbol confirmation 3 command) capable of specifying the end of the final variable display in the special state from the game control means. It is possible to execute the advance notice effect (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the special effect process shown in FIGS. 10-33 to determine the execution of the first meteor effect, the second meteor effect, and the stock effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to these features, even if the display period of the variable display result is lengthened in the final variable display in the special state, the pre-reading notice effect is executed from the time when the final variable display in the special state ends. You can improve the game entertainment during the period.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The game control means is characterized in that, as the variable display end information, dedicated variable display end information (for example, a symbol confirmation 2 command or a symbol confirmation 3 command) that is not transmitted except for the end of the final variable display in the special state is transmitted. It is supposed to be.
According to this feature, it is possible to simplify the execution control of the look-ahead notice effect.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
The game control means can determine whether or not each hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 determines a winning random value value shown in FIG. 10-10). The part that executes the process),
The effect executing means is
A special effect can be executed in the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the reception of the variable display end information that can specify the end of the final variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a symbol in the result screen display process shown in FIGS. 10-31. The first meteor effect, the second meteor effect, and the second meteor effect in the special effect process shown in FIGS. 10-33 based on the special effect determination flag that is turned on in response to the reception of the confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command. The part where stock production can be performed),
The special effect is performed during the display period in which the variable display result of the final variable display is displayed (for example, the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game). The first pattern for executing the effect (for example, the part for executing the first meteor effect or the stock effect during the symbol determination period of the 7th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the big hit game) and the final The second is not executed during the display period in which the variable display result of the variable display is displayed, but is executed in the variable display executed based on the hold storage determined to be controlled in an advantageous state by the game control means. It can be executed with a pattern (for example, the part where the second meteor effect is executed in the variable display of the second special symbol in which the 8th to 11th variable display results after the big hit game is a big hit or a small hit). It is characterized by.
According to this feature, the special effect is executed at different timings, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
The variable display of the first identification information can be executed based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition (for example, the part in which the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening). With a gaming machine that can execute variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second execution condition (for example, a part that can execute variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second starting winning opening). There,
The special state is a state in which the frequency of establishment of the second execution condition is higher than that of the non-special state (for example, a time saving state).
The game control means is executed in a non-special state including a variable display of the second identification information executed based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means by satisfying the second execution condition in the special state. Regarding the variable display of the second identification information, the non-special variable display end information corresponding to the non-special state is transmitted (for example, as shown in the modified example 098SG-4, the CPU 103 changes the second special symbol in the normal state. The part that sends a dedicated symbol confirmation command when the display is finished)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes possible to easily identify that the variable display executed in the non-special state corresponding to the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect has ended, so that the control in the effect execution means can be simplified.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 4) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player is provided. ,
The effect executing means has an advantage by the setting means when the holding storage that becomes an advantageous state is not stored in the holding storage means when the variable display end information that can specify the end of the final variable display is received. When the highest set value is set, it is possible to execute the same or similar effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect at a higher rate than when the maximum set value is not set (for example, variant 098SG-). As shown in 5, during the symbol determination period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot D, the hold memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot or a small hit in the 2nd special symbol hold memory. A part that makes it possible to execute a meteor effect, a stock effect, or an effect similar to these meteor effects or stock effects even if there is no such effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the look-ahead notice effect is executed, even if the variable display based on the hold memory related to the look-ahead notice effect is executed, it is not controlled to an advantageous state, so that the maximum setting value is set. Since it is suggested that there is, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure exemplifying the staging control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table, the big hit type determination table, the small hit type determination table, and the big hit type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for effect control and the reception command buffer at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol confirmation command transmission setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit A ends. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit B is finished. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit C is finished. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit D is finished. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state and the normal state after the big hit game of big hit E ends. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol and the opening pattern of a normal electric accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol fixing period and the opening / closing period of a normal electric accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol fixing period and the opening / closing period of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the staging control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the panel display effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern determination ratio of a panel display effect, and each display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the result screen display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background image update process. It is a flowchart which shows the special production process. It is a flowchart which shows the special production process. It is a flowchart which shows the special production process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed notification effect processing. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is controlled. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is controlled. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is controlled. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is controlled. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit E is controlled. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit E is controlled. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit E is controlled. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and each effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device at the end of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device when it is controlled to the time saving state. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit A ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D or big hit E ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D ends. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display device in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit E ends. It is a figure which shows the effect which can be executed in the symbol fixing period. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process in the rear variable display in the modification 098SG-1. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the modification 098SG-1, and the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect in the modification 098SG-1. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect in the modification 098SG-1. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process in front variable display in modification 098SG-1. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect in the modified example 098SG-1 is determined, and (B) is the figure showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggested effect during the front variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during front variable display when the execution of the setting suggestion effect in 1 is decided, and (C) is the suggestion during front variable display in variant example 098SG-1. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern of a character effect and a timer effect to be executed as an effect, and (D) is a figure which shows the big hit expectation degree of the character effect and a timer effect, and execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect in modification 098SG-1. .. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect in the modified example 098SG-1, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect in the modified example 098SG-1. ) Is a diagram showing the contents of each effect pattern of the timer effect in the modified example 098SG-1. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach in the modification 098SG-1. It is a timing chart of the effect executed when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E in the modification 098SG-3 is controlled.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit middle effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electrical components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric parts including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value is set. In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the staging operation using various staging devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the staging control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illuminated signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 098SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 098SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-54.

A first reserved storage display area 098SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 098SG005U are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 098SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 098SG005U, the reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is performed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) Generates based on the starting prize. That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is satisfied, the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed or the pachinko gaming machine. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display is not satisfied because 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state or the like, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. The hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 098SG005D is a hold storage display generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning opening, and is in the second hold storage display area 098SG005U. The hold memory display is a hold memory display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) through the second start prize opening.

In the feature unit 098SG, the hold storage display generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start prize opening is displayed in a round white display (first hold storage display area 098SG005D). Hold storage display), and the hold storage display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening is displayed in a round white display (second hold storage display area 098SG005U). Hold memory display). In addition, based on the hold memory display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, and the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening. The display mode of the hold storage display generated in the above may be different from the display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, the number of special symbol reserved storages is placed on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first reserved storage display area 098SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 098SG005U. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided to display the above identifiable. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The second hold display 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure reservation storage number is the storage number in which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of storages in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved storages of the first special figure and the number of reserved storages of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved storages).

On the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball unit 098SG007 in which the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B are integrated is provided.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007 constitutes the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A on the left side and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B on the right side. Further, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007, and the player can use the special variable winning ball unit via the cover body. It is possible to visually recognize the game ball flowing down in the 098SG007, particularly in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B.

The first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A includes a first special winning opening door 098SG701 driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 098SG082 (see FIG. 10-2), and is opened and closed by the first special winning opening door 098SG701. Form a changing first prize opening. The first large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the left portion of the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007. The first prize-winning door 098SG701 can slide and move in the front-rear direction between the closed position where the first prize-winning door is closed by driving the solenoid 098SG082 and the open position where the first prize-winning door is opened. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, when the solenoid 098SG082 is in the ON state, the first large winning opening door 098SG701 opens the first large winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the first large winning opening. Make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 098SG082 is in the off state, the first large winning opening door 098SG701 closes the first large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the first large winning opening. In this way, the first large winning opening changes into an open state that is advantageous for the player who can easily pass (enter) the game ball, and a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player because the game ball cannot pass (enter). In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the first prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first prize opening. You may.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first prize-winning opening is detected by the first count switch 098SG023 by passing through the first count switch 098SG023 (see FIG. 10-2) provided in the first prize-winning opening. Will be done. The game ball that has passed through the first count switch 098SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 098SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening opened in the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are opened. More prize balls will be paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the first large winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the first big prize opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to get the prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the first big winning opening. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first large winning opening are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an obstacle nail or the like (not shown), and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded open state, the second start is started. It is designed to win a prize in the winning opening.

The second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is formed so as to project upward from the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A, and is driven to open and close by the solenoid 098SG083 (see FIG. 10-2). A door 098SG711 is provided, and a second large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the second large winning opening door 098SG711. The second large winning opening is formed so as to open upward at the upper end portion of the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B. The second big winning opening door 098SG711 is between the first state (open state) in which the second big winning opening is opened by driving the solenoid 098SG083 and the second state (closed state) in which the second big winning opening is closed. It is provided so that it can slide in the front-back direction.

In the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, when the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning door 098SG711 is in the ON state, the second big winning door 098SG711 sets the second big winning door open, and the game ball is the second. Make it easier to pass (enter) through the two major winning openings. On the other hand, when the solenoid 098SG083 for the 2nd prize opening door 098SG711 is in the off state, the 2nd prize opening door 098SG711 closes the 2nd prize opening and the game ball passes through the 2nd prize opening. Make it impossible to (enter). In this way, the second major winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second major winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state is provided in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second major winning opening. You may.

The game ball that passes (enters) the second prize-winning opening is detected by the second count switch 098SG024A by passing through the second count switch 098SG024A installed in the second prize-winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 098SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening opened in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, other ordinary winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are used. More prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, if the second special winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second big winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the second big winning opening and obtain the winning ball. This is a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, a game ball flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the second large winning opening can flow down is formed. In the game ball flow path, a third count switch 098SG024B that can further detect the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 098SG024A is installed. The game ball that has passed through the third count switch 098SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. Further, the game ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. , Detected by the fourth count switch 24C.

It should be noted that the feature unit 098SG controls the game state after the small hit game to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 098SG024B during the small hit game described later. There is.

The passing gate 41 in the feature unit 098SG is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 098SG007.

In the feature unit 098SG, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged at a substantially central position of the game area. , The game ball that is weakly launched by the hitting operation handle (left-handed) flows down the left game area, and the game ball that is strongly launched by the hitting ball operation handle (right-handed) flows down the right game area. ing.

Further, the game ball flowing down the left game area can be won in the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game ball flowing down the right game area can be won in the variable winning ball device 6B and the first special variable winning ball device. A large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that the 098SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B can win a prize and can pass through the passing gate 41. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B cannot be won, and the passing gate 41 cannot be passed.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 displays a variable display of the normal symbol, such as the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 10-2. After the normal map start condition for execution is satisfied, it is normal based on the fact that the normal map start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, the variable display of the previous normal map is completed. The variable display of the normal figure by the symbol display 20 is started.

In this variable display of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time that is the variable display time of the normal symbol elapses after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the confirmed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display). .. At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "out of normal symbol". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal", expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. , Normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 10-2. For example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 10-2. After that, the variable display of the special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special figure or the end of the big hit game state. ..

In the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable display time elapses after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the special symbol is displayed. Derived display of the definite special symbol (variable display result) that is the variable display result of. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be "missing".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. To. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 098SG, as an example, a special symbol showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol showing the number "2" is used as a small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol of "-" is regarded as an off symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a missed symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, or a common special symbol in the variable display of both special symbols may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special figure and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the first big winning door of the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A The 230SG701 opens the first large winning opening in the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" or "10"). Even before the number of rounds to be executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win in the first big winning opening). May be good.

Further, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small hit" as a specific display result, in the small hit game state, the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is used. The 2nd big winning door 098SG711 opens the 2nd big winning door in the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. Make it a state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B becomes the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In the feature unit 098SG, the second big winning opening door 098SG711 is set to open once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit game state. It is not limited to, and may be opened a plurality of times in the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball winning in the second large winning opening passes through the third count switch 098SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 098SG024B. It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 098SG024B of the gaming ball.

In the feature unit 098SG, the game ball that has won the second prize opening always passes through the third count switch 098SG024B. That is, when a game ball wins a prize in the second big winning opening in the small hit game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the third count switch 098SG024B, and after the small hit game is completed, the CPU 103 controls the game ball to the big hit game state. Will be done. In this feature unit 098SG, when the variable display result is a small hit, the game ball wins the second big winning opening during the small hit game, so that the game is always controlled to the big hit game state after the small hit game is completed. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 098SG024B of the game ball, the second big winning opening door 098SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B has a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, and the second large winning opening is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. In the feature unit 098SG, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 098SG024B, the second special variable winning ball device 098SG007B is controlled to the first state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 098SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9"). Even before the number of times the round game is executed reaches the upper limit, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win in the second major winning opening). good.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in the feature unit 098SG, the time saving control (time saving control) is performed within a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 99 times, 7 times, 3 times, 1 time). And the normal state where the time reduction control is not performed. By performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (variable display time of the special figure) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the executed state) is performed. In the time saving control, the variable display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game state, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game ball presses the third count switch 098SG024B in the small hit game state. It suffices to end when one of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time reduction control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variable display time) in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be shorter than in the normal state. , The control to shorten the variable display time (variable display time of the normal figure) of the variable display of the normal figure by the normal symbol display 20 is shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the variable display of the normal figure each time is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, and the tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "hit the normal figure". It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts compared to the normal state, and the second start condition can be satisfied. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by enhancing the sex. As described above, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the variable display of the special figure can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

FIG. 10-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 098SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating a variable display start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the variable display start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B".

In the feature unit 098SG, by providing the fifth variable display result designation command and the sixth variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the small hit type in advance before the start of the variable display. Although the possible forms are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result specification command is that the CPU 103 has a variable display result of "small hit" with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Only may be notified in advance before the start of the variable display.

Command 8F00H is a variable other than the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D and the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed. In the display, it is a symbol confirmation 1 command for designating the variable display stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. Command 8F01H is a decorative symbol display area 5L of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 in the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot D is completed. , 5C, 5R is a symbol confirmation 2 command that specifies the variable display stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol. Command 8F02H is a decorative symbol display area 5L of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 in the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed. , 5C, 5R is a symbol confirmation 3 command that specifies the variable display stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), as a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed. The command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed. The command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure three times after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed. The command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which the time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the jackpot game of the jackpot C is completed. The command 9504H is a fifth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure seven times after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. The command 9505H is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time saving state) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the large winning opening that notifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the first hold storage display area 098SG005D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable in the second hold storage display area 098SG005U or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designation command for designating a winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the V prize has been won, that is, the third count switch 098SG024B has been turned on because the game ball has passed the third count switch 098SG024B. The command D2XXH is a command for notifying the remaining time reduction control number of the second special symbol in the time reduction state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (given) by the game ball winning a prize in the winning opening.

FIG. 10-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the feature unit 098SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

FIG. 10-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 098SG. In this feature unit 098SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B), the feature unit 098SG is provided with a plurality of different fluctuation patterns in advance according to the special symbol for executing the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and super reach α and super reach. There is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as β is executed. In the present feature unit 098SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), among the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol in the feature unit 098SG, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed is the super reach fluctuation. It is set shorter than the patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. Further, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this feature unit 098SG, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is executed. Is set to have a longer special figure variable display time than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 098SG, as described above, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation are set because the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach is set high. In the pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the feature unit 098SG is a non-reach variation having a special symbol variable display time different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Patterns and reach variation patterns are provided.

In this feature unit 098SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-6 and the like, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), and FIG. 10-6 ( In addition to the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in C) and the small hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 10-6 (D), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( Includes an out-of-figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

FIG. 10-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 at the time of executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for designating the special symbol for executing the variable display) is 1 (first), that is, For each of the case where the first special symbol is the target of variable display and the case where the variable display special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the second special symbol is the target of variable display. , A judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, only the big hit can be won, and the small hit is not won.

Further, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as in the case where the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second. Even when the special symbol is targeted for variable display, a big hit occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and about 1/7 of these judgment values are small. Since it is set as a judgment value corresponding to a hit, when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, a small hit is won with a probability (ratio) of about 1/7. There is.

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (big hit A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but whether or not the stop symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is to be a small hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not.

In the feature unit 098SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. A small hit judgment table is provided separately, and the big hit judgment is a common table for the case where the first special symbol is variable display and the case where the second special symbol is variable display regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. The small hit may be determined using a separate table only when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in this feature unit 098SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed not to win, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit may be won.

10-6 (B) and 10-6 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 10-6 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 10-6 (C) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine. In this feature unit 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) is provided with two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B. On the other hand, the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one type of jackpot C. That is, the jackpot that occurs when the first special symbol is variablely displayed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Only jackpot C is the jackpot that occurs.

FIG. 10-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type. It is a table referenced to determine. In this feature unit 098SG, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 098SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type D is executed. When the game ball passes through the third count switch 098SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type E is executed. It is supposed to be done. That is, these jackpot D and jackpot E are not the jackpot type determined by the random value MR2 for determining the hit type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball during the small hit game of either the small hit A or the small hit B. Is a jackpot type determined by passing through the third count switch 098SG024B.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 098SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-6 (E). In the feature unit 098SG, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A in which the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed. -Big hit E is set.

Of these jackpots A to jackpot E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the first jackpot is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the first jackpot into a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, one time reduction control is executed for the variable display of the second special symbol.

The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to the second state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, the big hit is again until the special figure game is executed three times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special figure game is executed three times. Time reduction control is executed until.

The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the first jackpot is changed to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, the big hit is again until the special figure game is executed 99 times or the special figure game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol. Time reduction control is executed until.

The jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called 9 rounds) in which the second big prize opening is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot D, the jackpot is again until the special figure game is executed 7 times or the special figure game is executed 7 times for the variable display of the second special symbol. Time reduction control is executed until.

The jackpot E is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called 9 rounds) in which the second big prize opening is changed to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, the big hit is again until the special figure game is executed 99 times or the special figure game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol. Time reduction control is executed until.

It should be noted that, in the time-saving state, the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times in the time saving state and immediately after the time saving state ends, a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the game ball is in a small hit game. Since a big hit may be generated by winning a V prize, a so-called consecutive villa state in which a big hit game state is likely to occur continuously is obtained.

In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed, since the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to one, the variable display of the second special symbol and the one time are performed. The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol of 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 54%.

Further, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 3 times, so that the 3 times variable display of the 2nd special symbol and the 3 times The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol of 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 66%.

Further, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 7 times, so that the 7 times variable display of the second special symbol and the 7 times are performed. The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the variable display of the second special symbol (11 times in total). 2 The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs in the variable display of a special symbol and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs) is set to about 82%.

Then, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 99 times, so that the variable display of the second special symbol of the 99 times and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed. The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories generated during the 99 times variable display of the second special symbol (total 103 above). The total of the rate at which a big hit occurs and the rate at which a game ball wins a V and a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol of the times) is set to almost 100%.

The feature unit 098SG is provided with five types of big hits A to E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hits may be provided. Further, four or less types may be provided.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A variation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a variation pattern determination table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In particular, the variation pattern determination table for jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variation pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is the normal state, and is a variation pattern of normal reach jackpots (PB1-1). For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A jackpot variation pattern A to which a numerical value is assigned as a determination value is provided. In the jackpot variation pattern A, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B", the super reach β is easily determined, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the super reach β is easily determined. By allocating the super reach α so that it can be easily determined, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the “big hit B” will occur when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed.

Further, the variation pattern determination table for jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variation pattern determination table selected when the gaming state is a time saving state, and is a variation pattern of non-reach jackpots (PB1-4). ), A big hit variation pattern B is provided in which all random values in the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take are assigned as determination values.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the deviation variation selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is one or less. The pattern determination table A, the deviation pattern determination table B selected when the game state is the normal state and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 3 or more, and the game state is the time saving state. The deviation pattern determination table C selected for is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and super A predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) and the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the fact that the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 3 or more. PA2-1), fluctuation pattern out of super reach α (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern out of super reach β (PA2-3), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for deviation, all of the range that the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA1-3) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time reduction control. A random number value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. Therefore, when the number of reserved storages increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved storages are easily digested, and the number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning the start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start prize that is not stored on hold. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes long, and it becomes possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) selected during the time reduction control is more variable than the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The time is short. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during the time reduction control, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time reduction control is not executed (when the gaming state is the normal state). Since the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA1-3), it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the variable display of the second special symbol not being started during the time reduction control.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 098SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-7, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Has been done. The game control data holding area 098SG150 shown in FIG. 10-7 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 098SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 098SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 098SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 098SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 098SG153, the game control counter setting unit 098SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a variable display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 098SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining a variable display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are used as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 098SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 098SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 098SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 098SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 098SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 098SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 098SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 098SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 098SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 098SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 098SG154, numerical data indicating random values, for example, random values MR1 to MR4, which are not generated by the random number circuit 104, are stored as random count values, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 10-2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. There is.

As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, a game effect lamp 9, a decorative LED, an effect model, etc.). A staging control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of staging control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content or the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, an effect control pattern at the time of variable display of a special figure, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

The staging control pattern at the time of variable display of the special figure corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is the period from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the definite special symbol that is the result of displaying the special symbol. From data showing the control contents of various effects such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect to be executed corresponding to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The special figure variable display effect control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each variable pattern for executing the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the staging control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 holds data for staging control as shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the staging operation. Area 098SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 098SG190 shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 098SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 098SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 098SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 098SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 098SG191 has a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 098SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 098SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 098SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 098SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 098SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 098SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 098SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 098SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 098SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 098SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 098SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the number of pending storages. Three commands called a notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 098SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative pattern fluctuation stop processing executed when the process is finished.

Further, the start winning command buffer 098SG194A of the feature unit 098SG has a variable display corresponding panel to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the second special figure variable display compatible panel display effect processing (FIG. 10-29) described later. The storage area for setting the panel pattern determined flag indicating that the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the second special figure hold storage has already been determined is the buffer number "2-0" of the second special figure hold storage. It is secured every "2-4".

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 098SG194A shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that was terminated immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In this feature unit 098SG, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are received, and these are determined. When the commands are received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A as the hold storage of each special figure.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 098SG will be described. FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (098SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (098SGS101; Y), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (098SGS101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number (098SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 098SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in 098SGS102 (098SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 is set to "1" (S103). ..

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 098SGS101 (098SGS101; N), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit in 098SGS102 (098SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (098SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (098SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (098SGS104; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number (098SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure hold storage number by reading, for example, the second hold storage number count value which is the storage value of the second hold storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 098SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in 098SGS105 (098SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 is set to "2" (S106). ..

After executing any of the processes of 098SGS103 and 098SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (098SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (098SGS108). For example, the total reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 098SG154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the processing of 098SGS108, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 098SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (098SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (098SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151A stores numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 098SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the hit type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". Is used to determine the big hit type / small hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 098SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 098SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (098SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 can be used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

The CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (098SGS112) following the process of 098SGS111. After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (098SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 098SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (098SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 098SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (098SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 098SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (098SGS116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-10 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by 098SGS112 in FIG. 10-9 as a winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 098SG, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" by the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not to control the game state and whether or not to control the small hit game state as a "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-11 and FIG. 10-12), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the prize-winning random number value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not the jackpot is determined at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and based on this determination result, the panel display effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like as described later. become.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-10, the CPU 103 first selects and sets the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) (098SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 098SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (098SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 098SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by 098SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved at the time of variable display (098SGS123; N), it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is 1. (098SGS124). When the start port buffer value is 2 (098SGS124; N), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 098SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is a predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (098SGS125).

When the start port buffer value is 1 in 098SGS124 (098SGS124; Y) or when the random number value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range in 1098SGS125 (098SGS125; N), the transmission setting of the symbol specification command according to the deviation is performed. The random value determination process at the time of winning is terminated (098SGS126).

When the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in 098SGS125 (098SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the small hit is set and the winning random number value determination process is terminated (098SGS127).

When the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in 098SGS123 (098SGS123; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot is set and the winning random number value determination process is terminated (098SGS128). The symbol designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. ..

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 5 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the target for which the variation pattern is set is the first special figure (098SGS131). Whether or not the target for which the variation pattern is set is the first special figure may be determined, for example, by whether or not the variation special map designation buffer value is “1”.

Then, when the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is the first special figure (098SGS131; Y), the variable display result (whether or not the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set), the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the game state is displayed. Select (098SGS132).

Specifically, as the variable pattern determination table that can be selected, as described above, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit (the time saving flag is not set and the big hit flag is set). The jackpot variation pattern determination table A selected in (when), the jackpot selected when the game state is in the time saving state and the variable display result is the jackpot (when the time saving flag and the jackpot flag are set). For variable pattern determination table B, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is out of order (the time saving flag and the jackpot flag are not set), and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 1 or less. The deviation pattern determination table A selected for, the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is out of order (the time saving flag and the jackpot flag are not set), and the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is 3. The deviation pattern determination table B selected when the number is equal to or more, and the deviation variation selected when the game state is the time saving state (when the time saving flag is set but the jackpot flag is not set). A pattern determination table C is prepared. In these fluctuation pattern determination tables, all the values of the random number value MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 1, so that only the fluctuation pattern of 1 may be uniquely determined. Since the range value of the random number value MR3 is assigned to the plurality of fluctuation patterns without overlapping, any one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns may be determined.

Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number value of MR3 stored in association with the hold number "1" of the first special figure hold storage unit 098SG151A, and uses the read random number value in the variation pattern determination table selected by 098SGS132. After determining the associated variation pattern as the variation pattern to be set (098SGS133), the process proceeds to 098SGS149. That is, in 098SGS133, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random number value MR3 read from the hold storage and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, when the target for setting the fluctuation pattern is not the first special figure, that is, when it is the second special figure (098SGS131; N), is the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 098SG152 turned on? By determining whether or not (whether or not it is set), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-saving state in which time-saving control is performed (098SGS135). If the time saving flag is not set (098SGS135; N), the process proceeds to 098SGS161 shown in FIG. 10-12, and if the time saving flag is set (098SGS135; Y), 1 is added to the time saving state variable display count counter. After updating (098SGS136), it is determined whether or not the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set (098SGS137).

The game state flags (1st game state flag to 6th game state flag) are set corresponding to each game state specification command in which the CPU 103 sets transmission to the effect control board 12 in the jackpot end process described later. It is a flag. In the feature unit 098SG, the first game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the first game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end process, and is the second game state flag. Is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the second game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end process, and the third game state flag is the effect control by the CPU 103 in the jackpot end process. It is a flag indicating that the transmission setting of the third game state designation command has been made to the board, and the fourth game state flag is the fourth game state designation command to the effect control board by the CPU 103 in the jackpot end process. It is a flag indicating that the transmission setting has been made, and the fifth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the fifth game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end process. The sixth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the sixth game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end process.

That is, in the processing of 098SGS137, whether or not the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the second game state designation command or the third game state designation command to the effect control board 12 at the end of the immediately preceding jackpot game (furthermore, the immediately preceding jackpot game). Whether the time saving state controlled after the end of the game is the time saving state in which the time saving control is performed once after the big hit game of the jackpot A is completed, or the time saving state in which the time saving control is performed three times after the jackpot game of the tail hit B is completed. It is a process of determining (whether or not).

If the second game state flag or the third game state flag is not set (098SGS137; N), the process proceeds to 098SGS172 shown in FIG. 10-12, and if the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set. (098SGS137; Y), it is determined whether or not the time reduction state variable display count counter indicating the variable display number after being controlled to the time reduction state is 1 (098SGS138).

When the time reduction state variable display count counter is 1, that is, in the first variable display after being controlled to the time reduction state (098SGS138; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS139), and the jackpot is determined. When the flag is set (098SGS139; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to the fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with the special figure fluctuation time of 50 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). Then (098SGS140) and proceed to 098SGS149. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS139; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS141). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS141; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 50 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS142), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS141; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). (098SGS143) and proceed to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, when the time reduction state variable display count counter is not 1 (098SGS138; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS144), and when the jackpot flag is set (098SGS144; Y). Uniquely determines the variation pattern as the variation pattern (PB3-1) of the non-reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 2 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (098SGS145), and proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS144; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS146). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS146; Y), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). 1) is uniquely determined (098SGS147), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS146; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS148), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

Further, in the 098SGS161, which shifts to the case where it is determined to be "N" in the 098SGS135 because the time saving flag is not set, either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set at the end of the big hit game. Determine if it is.

Then, when either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A or the big hit B, the game state is changed. Further, when the time reduction state is controlled to the normal state (098SGS161; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS162), and when the jackpot flag is set (098SGS162; Y). The variation pattern is uniquely determined to be the variation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (098SGS163), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS162; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS164). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS164; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 20 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS165), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS164; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). (098SGS166) and proceed to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, when neither the second game state flag nor the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of any of the big hit games C to E. When the gaming state is further controlled from the time saving state to the normal state (098SGS161; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS167), and when the jackpot flag is set (098SGS167; Y). In), the variation pattern is uniquely determined to be the variation pattern (PB3-2) of the non-reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 50 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (098SGS168), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS167; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS169). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS169; Y), the variation pattern is a non-reach small hit variation pattern (PC3-) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 50 seconds. 2) is uniquely determined (098SGS170), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS169; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS171), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

Further, when the time saving flag is set (098SGS135; Y), but neither the second gaming state flag nor the third gaming state flag is set, and therefore, it is determined as "N" in 098SGS137 (that is,). In the 098SGS172 that shifts to (when the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the big hit game of any of the big hit C to the big hit E), whether or not the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is any of 1 to 6. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed within 6 times after being controlled to the time saving state. When the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is any of 1 to 6, 098SGS172; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS173), and when the jackpot flag is set (098SGS173). In 098SGS173; Y), the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined to the fluctuation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with the special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (098SGS174), and 098SGS149. move on. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS173; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS175). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS175; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 20 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS176), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. If the small hit flag is not set (098SGS175; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0 (098SGS176a). When the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special time reduction counter is 0 (098SGS176a; Y), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). The variation pattern (PA3-3) is uniquely determined (098SGS176b), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

When the values of the total time reduction counter and the second special figure time reduction counter are neither 0 (098SGS176a; N), the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 7 seconds. The non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA3-2) is uniquely determined (098SGS177), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is not any one of 1 to 6, it is determined whether or not the time reduction state variable display count counter is 7 (098SGS172; N) (098SGS178). When the time reduction state variable display number counter is 7 (098SGS178; Y), whether or not the fourth game state flag is set, that is, the time reduction state is the time reduction state after the jackpot game of jackpot C is completed. It is determined whether or not (098SGS179).

When the fourth game state flag is set (098SGS179; Y), the variation pattern is changed to any one of PB3-2, PC3-2, PA3-3, and PA3-2 by executing the processing of 098SGS173 to 098SGS177. And proceed to 098SGS149. Further, when the 4th game state flag is not set, that is, when the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit D or the big hit Eno big hit game is completed (the 5th game state flag or the 6th game state flag is set). If so, 098SGS179; N) determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS180), and if the jackpot flag is set (098SGS180; Y), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined for the variation pattern (PB3-3) of the reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 55 seconds (098SGS181), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS180; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS182). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS182; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-3) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 55 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS183), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS182; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). (098SGS184) and proceed to 098SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time reduction state variable display count counter is not 7 (098SGS178; N), or if the 5th game state flag is not set (098SGS179; N), is the 6th game state flag set? Whether or not, that is, whether or not the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed (098SGS185).

When the sixth game state flag is not set (098SGS185; N), the above-mentioned processing of 098SGS173 to 098SGS177 is executed to determine the variation pattern to be one of PB3-2, PC3-2, and PA3-2. If the sixth game state flag is set (098SGS185; Y), the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any of 8 to 10, that is, whether or not the value is any of 8 to 10. , It is determined whether or not it is the 8th to 10th variable display of the second special figure after being controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed (098SGS186). When the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is any value of 8 to 10, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS187), and when the jackpot flag is set (098SGS187;). In Y), the variation pattern is uniquely determined to be the variation pattern (PB3-1) of the non-reach jackpot with the special figure variation time of 2 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (098SGS188), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. .. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS187; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS189). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS189; Y), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). 1) is uniquely determined (098SGS190), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS189; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS191), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

Further, when the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is not any of 8 to 10 (098SGS186; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is 11. 098SGS192), when the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is not 11, that is, when the 11th variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game of the big hit E (098SGS192; N), the above-mentioned 098SGS173 ~ 098SGS177 is executed, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of PB3-2, PC3-2, and PA3-2, and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. When the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is 11, 098SGS192; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (098SGS193), and when the jackpot flag is set (098SGS193; Y), the variation pattern is the special figure variation shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). The variation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot with a time of 20 seconds is uniquely determined (098SGS194), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the big hit flag is not set (098SGS193; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (098SGS195). When the small hit flag is set (098SGS195; Y), the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the reach small hit (PC3-2) in which the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is 20 seconds. ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS196), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149. Further, when the small hit flag is not set (098SGS195; N), the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 10-5 (B). ) Is uniquely determined (098SGS197), and the process proceeds to 098SGS149.

In 098SGS149, the CPU 103 performs update storage of the determined fluctuation pattern (098SGS149). Then, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. (098SGS149a) is set to start the fluctuation of the special symbol so as to start any of the above. As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the processing of 098SGS149a, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (098SGS150). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in 098SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The various commands for which transmission settings have been made are transmitted to the staging control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

After the processing of 098SGS150 is executed, the special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (098SGS151). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). The time required. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (098SGS152), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer is operating (timer counting) (098SGS201).

When the symbol confirmation period timer is in operation (098SGS201; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out after the symbol confirmation period timer described later is set to -1 (098SGS213) (098SGS214). .. When the symbol confirmation period timer is not timer-out (098SGS214; N), the special symbol stop processing is terminated, while when the symbol confirmation period timer is timer-out (098SGS214; Y), the stop symbol is off. (098SGS215), and if it is an outlier symbol (098SGS215; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing. (098SGS216), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

Further, when the stop symbol is not an out-of-order symbol (098SGS215; N), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol (098SGS217), and when it is a jackpot symbol (098SGS217; Y), a special symbol is used. After updating the value of the process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (098SGS218), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In addition to the processing of 098SGS218, the processing of setting the jackpot display time timer and the processing of setting the number of times the jackpot is opened in the opening number counter may be executed.

When the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol (098SGS217; N), the stop symbol is a small hit symbol, so the value of the special symbol process flag is "8" corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing. After updating to (098SGS219), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In addition to the processing of 098SGS219, the processing of setting the small hit display time timer and the processing of setting the number of small hits opened in the open number counter may be executed.

On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation period timer is not operating (098SGS201; N), the fluctuation of the special symbol is terminated, and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving) on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control to display (also referred to as display) (098SGS202). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. Further, the stop symbol is determined at the start of the variable display.

Further, the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is executed (098SGS203). Then, whether the stored fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (any of PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, PB3-1, and PB3-2 shown in FIG. 10-5). When it is determined whether or not (098SGS204) and the stored fluctuation pattern is not the jackpot fluctuation pattern (098SGS204; N), the stored fluctuation pattern is further the small hit fluctuation pattern (FIG. 10-5). It is determined whether or not it is PC3-1, P3-2, or PC3-3 shown in (098SGS231), and when the stored fluctuation pattern is not the jackpot fluctuation pattern (098SGS231; N). Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (098SGS246), and when the time saving flag is not set (098SGS246; N), the symbol confirmation period timer is set to the second period (0.5 seconds). After setting the corresponding value (098SGS257), make settings to send the game state specification command that specifies the normal state corresponding to the fact that the time reduction flag is not set, and the remaining second special figure time reduction notification command (remaining second special figure time reduction notification command). 098SGS258), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the stored fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (098SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 has a game state flag (first game state) if the time reduction flag is set and the time reduction flag is set. Clear (098SGS205) from the flag to the sixth game status flag, and hit start 1 designated command (big hit A) and hit start 2 designated command (big hit B) according to the type of big hit stored in the effect control board 12. , Set to send the hit start 3 designated command (big hit C) (098SGS207).

Further, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (098SGS208). Then, a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol determination period timer (098SGS209), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the stored fluctuation pattern is a small hit fluctuation pattern (098SGS231; Y), the effect control board 12 is subjected to the hit start 4 designated command (small hit A) or the hit start 5 corresponding to the small hit. Make settings for transmitting the designated command (small hit B) (098SGS232). Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (098SGS233).

When the time saving flag is not set (098SGS233; N), the time saving flag is not set after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS240). The game state specification command for designating the normal state corresponding to the above and the remaining second special figure time reduction notification command are set (098SGS241), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

Further, when the time reduction flag is set (098SGS233; Y), after the total time reduction count counter is set to -1 (098SGS234), is the variable special figure designation buffer "1" indicating the first special figure? It is determined whether or not (098SGS235). Then, when the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (098SGS235; N), that is, when the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (098SGS235; N). 098SGS236), proceed to 098SGS237, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (098SGS235; Y), that is, when the target of the stop display is the first special figure, 098SGS236 is executed without executing 098SGS236. move on.

In 098SGS237, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0. Then, when the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is not 0 (098SGS237; N), the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol confirmation period timer. After setting (098SGS240), the game state specification command for specifying the time saving state corresponding to the time saving flag being set and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command are set to be transmitted (098SGS241), and special. The symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0 (098SGS237; Y), the time reduction flag is cleared (098SGS238), and the total time reduction counter and the second special figure time reduction counter are used. After clearing the value of the counter (098SGS239), the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS240), and the time saving flag is not set by clearing. The setting for transmitting the game state specification command for specifying the state is made (098SGS241), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. Since the time saving flag is not set in the processing of 098SGS241 when the time saving flag is cleared, it is not necessary to execute the setting for transmitting the second special figure time saving number notification command.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set and the time reduction flag is set (098SGS246; Y), that is, when the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed in the time reduction state, the total time reduction counter. After -1 (098SGS249), it is determined whether or not the variation special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure (098SGS248). Then, when the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (098SGS248; N), that is, when the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (098SGS248; N). 098SGS249), proceed to 098SGS250, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (098SGS248; Y), that is, when the target of the stop display is the first special figure, the 098SGS250 is set to 098SGS250 without executing 098SGS249. move on.

In the 098SGS250, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0. When the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is 0 (098SGS250; Y), the time reduction flag is cleared (098SGS251), and the total time reduction counter and the second special figure are used. Clear the value of the time reduction counter (098SGS252). Further, the stored fluctuation pattern is any of the fluctuation patterns (PA1-1, PA1-3, PA1-3, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. 10-5) that are out of the first special figure. ) (098SGS252a).

When the stored fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern out of the first special figure (098SGS252a; Y), a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS240). A setting is made to send a game state specification command that specifies a normal state corresponding to the fact that the time reduction flag is not set by clearing (098SGS241), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. When the stored fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern out of the second special figure (any of PA3-1, P3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4 shown in FIG. 10-5) (098SGS252a; Y) Further, it is determined whether the stored fluctuation pattern is a non-reach PA3-1 having a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 ms or a non-reach PA3-3 having a special figure fluctuation time of 50,000 ms (098SGS252b). ).

When the stored fluctuation pattern is PA3-1 or PA3-3 (098SGS252b; Y), the value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds) is set in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS253), and the time reduction flag is cleared. A setting is made to send a game state specification command that specifies a normal state corresponding to the fact that it is not set by (098SGS258), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. In the process of 098SGS258 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to execute the setting for transmitting the second special figure time saving number notification command. When the stored fluctuation pattern is a non-reach PA3-2 having a special map fluctuation time of 7,000 ms or a non-reach PA3-4 having a special map fluctuation time of 55,000 ms (098SGS252b; N), Proceed to 098SGS256.

Further, when the value of the total time reduction counter or the second special figure time reduction counter is not 0 (098SGS250; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state variable display number counter is 7. (098SGS254). When the value of the time reduction state variable display count counter is not 7 (098SGS254; N), the time reduction flag is set after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS257). Settings are made to send the game state specification command that specifies the time reduction state corresponding to the setting and the remaining second special figure time reduction number notification command (098SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated, while the time reduction state is variable. When the value of the display count counter is 7 (098SGS254; Y), the stored fluctuation pattern is PA3-4 out of reach where the special figure fluctuation time is 5500 ms (098SGS255; Y). Proceed to 098SGS256.

In 098SGS256, after setting the value corresponding to the third period (12 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer (098SGS256), the game state specification command for specifying the normal state corresponding to the fact that the time reduction flag is not set and the remaining number 1 2 Set to send the special figure time reduction notification command (098SGS258), and end the special symbol stop processing.

On the other hand, when the stored fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern other than PA3-4 (098SGS255; N), the time is shortened after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) in the symbol confirmation period timer. The setting for transmitting the game state specification command for specifying the time reduction state corresponding to the set of the flag and the remaining second special figure time reduction number notification command (098SGS258) is performed, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

In this way, in this feature unit 098SG, after the big hit game is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol of the number of times set in the second special figure time reduction counter is executed or set in the total time reduction counter. The time saving state is set to continue until the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the number of times is executed. Therefore, for example, when the time is controlled in a state where the second special symbol hold storage does not exist, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed before the variable display of the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest due to the player missing the opportunity for the display result to be a small hit.

Further, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol determination period of the variable display ends, but the pachinko gaming machine of the feature unit 098SG In No. 1, when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (see FIGS. 10-26).

10-14 is a flowchart showing the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process shown in FIG. 10-13. In the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 1, that is, whether or not the executed variable display is the first special figure variable display (098SGS601). .. When the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (098SGS601; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation 1 command is executed and the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process is terminated (098SGS602).

Further, when the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (098SGS601; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (098SGS603), and when the time saving flag is set (098SGS603; Y). Further, it is determined whether or not the fourth game state flag is set, that is, whether or not the variable display is the variable display after the big hit game of the big hit C is completed (098SGS604). When the fourth game state flag is not set (098SGS604; N), whether or not the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is 7, that is, in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D or big hit E is completed. It is determined whether or not the seventh variable display is completed (098SGS605).

When the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is 7 (098SGS605; Y), whether or not the sixth game state flag is set, that is, after the executed variable display is the big hit E after the big hit game is completed. It is determined whether or not the display is variable (the seventh variable display in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big hit E) (098SGS606).

When the fifth game state flag is set (098SGS606; N), the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation 2 command is executed to end the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process (098SGS607), and the sixth game state flag is set. If (098SGS606; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation 3 command is executed, and the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process is terminated (098SGS608).

When the time saving flag is not set (098SGS603; N), when the fourth game state flag is set (098SGS604; Y), the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (098SGS605; N). ) Executes the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation command 1 command and ends the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process (098SGS602).

The symbol confirmation command for which transmission setting has been made in the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (S27) shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in 118 of FIG. 5 as the small hit opening pre-process. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first sets the small hit display time timer by -1 (098SGS261), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has timed out (098SGS262). If the small hit display time timer is not timered out (098SGS262; N), the small hit opening preprocessing is terminated, while if the small hit display time timer is timered out (098SGS262; Y), the second big prize is won. A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set in the opening time timer for opening the mouth (098SGS263). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9" (098SGS264), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119), and the small hit opening preprocessing is terminated.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 5 as the small hit opening process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the open time timer to -1. (098SGS271). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (098SGS272).

If the open time timer is out of the timer (098SGS272; Y), it shifts to 098SGS285, and if the open time timer is not out of the timer (098SGS272; N), it is the opening timing of the second prize opening. Is determined (098SGS273). When it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the second big winning opening to the open state by driving the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning opening door 098SG711 (098SGS274). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening according to the round is set (098SGS275), and the process proceeds to 098SGS276. It should be noted that the command designated during opening of the large winning opening, which is set to be transmitted in 098SGS275, is transmitted to the staging control board 12 by the above-mentioned command control process. If it is not the opening timing of the second big winning opening (098SGS273; N), it shifts to 098SGS276 without going through 098SGS274 and 098SGS275.

In 098SGS276, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the second large winning opening (098SGS276). When it is the closing timing of the second big winning opening (098SGS276; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second big winning opening to the closed state by driving the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning opening door 098SG711 (098SGS277). .. Then, after opening the large winning opening according to the round, the transmission setting of the designated command is set (098SGS278), and the process proceeds to 098SGS279. It should be noted that the command specified during the opening of the large winning opening, which is set to be transmitted in 098SGS278, is transmitted to the staging control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the second big winning opening (098SGS276; N), it shifts to 098SGS279 without going through 098SGS277 and 098SGS278.

In 098SGS279, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 098SG024B is turned on (098SGS279). If the third count switch 098SG024B is not turned on (098SGS279; N), the small hit opening process is terminated, and if the third count switch 098SG024B is turned on (098SGS279; Y), the third count switch is already on. It is determined whether or not the count switch 098SG024B is turned on, that is, whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the third count switch 098SG024B is set (098SGS280). If the V winning flag is set (098SGS280; Y), the small hit opening process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set (098SGS280; N), the V winning flag is set (098SGS281). ..

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (098SGS282). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above. Further, if the second big winning opening is in the open state, the CPU 103 controls the second big winning opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 098SG083 for the second big winning opening door 098SG711 (098SGS283), and the opening time. Clear the timer (098SGS284).

Then, in 098SGS285, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “10” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end process (S120) (098SGS285), and ends the small hit opening process.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S120 of FIG. 5 as the small hit end process. In the small hit end process, is the CPU 103 operating the small hit end display timer? It is determined whether or not (098SGS301). When the small hit end display timer is not operating (098SGS301; N), the small hit flag is cleared (098SGS302), and the transmission setting of the hit end designation command according to the small hit is set to the effect control board 12 (098SGS303). ). The hit end designation command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small hit end display time is set in the small hit end display timer (098SGS304), and the small hit end process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is operating (098SGS301; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (098SGS305). Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small hit end display timer has timed out (098SGS306). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed (098SGS306; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 098SG024B is turned on (098SGS307). If the third count switch 098SG024B is not turned on (098SGS307; N), the small hit end process is terminated, and if the third count switch 098SG024B is turned on (098SGS307; Y), the third count is already performed. It is determined whether or not the switch 098SG024B is turned on, that is, whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the third count switch 098SG024B is set (098SGS308). If the V winning flag is set (098SGS308; Y), the small hit end process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set (098SGS308; N), the V winning flag is set (098SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (098SGS310), and ends the small hit end process. The V winning notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 in the command control process (S17) described above.

Further, when the small hit end display time has elapsed in 098SGS306 (098SGS306; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (098SGS311). When the V winning flag is gusseted (098SGS311; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (098SGS312, 098SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type from "big hit D" and "big hit E" based on the small hit type in which the V prize is generated (098SGS314). As for the big hit type, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (D), when the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the big hit type is determined to be "big hit D". When the small hit type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit B", the big hit type is determined to be "big hit E". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 098SG155 (098SGS315), the determined jackpot type can be selected. Remember and proceed to 098SGS316.

After executing 098SGS315, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" (098SGS316), which is a value corresponding to the large hit opening pre-processing (S114), and ends the small hit end processing.

That is, in this feature unit 098SG, the game ball passes through the third count switch 098SG024B not only during the small hit game but also during the period until the small hit end display time elapses after the small hit game ends. Therefore, even if the game ball wins in the second big winning opening immediately before the end of the small hit game, the big hit game is executed after the small hit end process is completed by passing the game ball through the third count switch 098SG024B. It is supposed to be done.

If the V winning flag is not set in 098SGS311 (098SGS311; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (098SGS311; N). 098SGS317), the small hit end process is terminated.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (098SGS321). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (098SGS321; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). Set (098SGS322) and end the process.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (098SGS321; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (098SGS323). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (098SGS324). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (098SGS324; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is jackpot A (098SGS325). When the jackpot type is jackpot A (098SGS325; Y), "1" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "5" is set in the total time reduction counter (098SGS326, 098SGS327), and 098SGS339 is set. move on.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is not jackpot A (098SGS325; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS328). When the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS328; Y), "3" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "7" is set in the total time reduction counter (098SGS329, 098SGS330), and 098SGS339 is set. move on.

Further, when the jackpot type is not the jackpot B (098SGS328; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot C (098SGS331). When the jackpot type is jackpot C (098SGS331; Y), "99" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "100" is set in the total time reduction counter (098SGS332, 098SGS333), and 098SGS339 is set. move on.

Further, when the jackpot type is not jackpot C (098SGS321; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot D (098SGS334). When the jackpot type is jackpot D (098SGS334; Y), "7" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "11" is set in the total time reduction counter (098SGS335, 098SGS336), and 098SGS339 is set. move on.

When the jackpot type is not the jackpot D (098SGS334; N), it is assumed that the jackpot type is the jackpot E, and "99" is set in the second special figure time reduction counter and "100" is set in the total time reduction counter. Set (098SGS337, 098SGS338) and proceed to 098SGS339.

In 098SGS339, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the game state designation command according to the big hit type of the executed big hit game. In 098SGS339, the CPU 103 uses a second game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot A, a third game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot B, and an executed jackpot. If the jackpot type of the game is jackpot C, the 4th game state specification command, if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot D, the 5th game state designation command, if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot E The transmission setting of the sixth game state specification command may be executed. Further, the game state designation command set to be transmitted in 098SGS339 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

After executing the processing of 098SGS339, the CPU 103 sets "0" in the time saving state variable display count counter and ends the jackpot end processing (098SGS340).

By executing each process by the CPU 103 as described above, as shown in FIG. 10-19, after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed, first, as a time saving state, one variable display of the second special symbol is performed for 50 seconds. It is executed over. After the variable display ends, the time saving flag is cleared (the game state is controlled to the normal state) at the timing when the variable display ends, and the variable display is displayed over the first period (10 seconds) as the symbol confirmation period. It will be stopped. Then, after the first period has elapsed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 7 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed. At the end timing of these variable displays, the CPU 103 executes the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, so that the symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times as a time saving state. The first variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 50 seconds, and the second and third variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 seconds. In the first and second variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the third variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the symbol confirmation period extends over the first period (10 seconds). And the variable display is stopped. Then, after the first period has elapsed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 7 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed. At the end timing of these variable displays, the CPU 103 executes the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, so that the symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-21, after the jackpot game of jackpot C is completed, first, 99 times of variable display of the second special symbol is executed as a time saving state. The variable display of the second special symbol from the first time to the 98th time in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the 99th variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 50 seconds. In the variable display of the second special symbol from the first time to the 98th time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the 99th variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the symbol confirmation period extends over the first period (10 seconds). And the variable display is stopped. Then, after the first period has elapsed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed. At the end timing of these variable displays, the CPU 103 executes the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process, so that the symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-22, after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 55 seconds. In the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the 7th variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the symbol confirmation period extends over the third period (12 seconds). And the variable display is stopped. Then, after the first period has elapsed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed up to four times in a state where the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. In the variable display of the second special symbol four times at the maximum, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display is completed. In the time saving state, the symbol confirmation 2 command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process at the seventh variable display end timing of the second special symbol. When the PU 103 executes the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process at the end timing of the variable display of the other time reduction state and the variable display after the time reduction state ends, the symbol confirmation 1 command is issued to the effect control board 12. It is supposed to be sent.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-23, after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed, first, 99 times of variable display of the second special symbol is executed as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed for 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed for 20 seconds. In the variable display of the second special symbol from the first to the sixth time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for a third period (12 seconds) as a symbol confirmation period. After the lapse of the third period, the variable display of the second special symbol from the 8th to the 11th is executed for 2 seconds. In the 8th to 11th variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped for the second period (0.5 seconds). For the variable display of the second special symbol after the twelfth time, the same control as after the big hit game of the big hit C (see FIG. 10-21) is executed. In the time-saving state, the CPU 103 executes the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process at the seventh variable display end timing of the second special symbol, so that the symbol confirmation 3 command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. By executing the symbol confirmation command transmission setting process at the end timing of the variable display in another time saving state, the symbol confirmation 1 command is transmitted to the staging control board 12. ..

Next, the variable display of the ordinary symbol will be described. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol process process shown in FIG. In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 (098SGS351). When the gate switch 21 is turned on (098SGS351; Y), the processing at the time of passing through the normal gate (098SGS352) is executed. In the processing at the time of passing through the normal map gate, for example, it is determined whether or not the normal figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (for example, 4). If the number of reserved normal figures is not the upper limit, the number of reserved normal figures is incremented by 1, the value of the random number MR4 is extracted, and the extracted value is stored as a new reserved memory of the normal figure.

After executing the process at the time of passing through the normal map gate or when the gate switch 21 is off (098SGS351; N), the CPU 103 executes any of the processes of 098SGS353 to 098SGS357 according to the value of the normal map process flag.

The normal symbol normal processing of 098SGS353 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the normal symbol game (normal symbol variable display) based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the normal symbol normal processing, the display result derives whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is "hit (normal symbol hit)" based on the value of the random number value MR4 extracted in the normal symbol gate passage processing. Make a decision (predetermined) before it is displayed. Further, in the normal symbol normal processing, a confirmed normal symbol (either a hit symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal symbol normal processing ends.

The normal symbol variation pattern setting process of 098SGS354 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be one of those shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A) based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "hit" and the game state. Processing to be done is included. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process in the feature unit 098SG, when the display result of the normal symbol is "off" and the gaming state is the time saving state, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is changed to the normal symbol variation time of 1. If the fluctuation pattern of the deviation in seconds (FA1-1) is uniquely determined, and the display result of the normal symbol is "off" and the gaming state is other than the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is usually used. If the deviation pattern (FA1-2) with a figure fluctuation time of 30 seconds is uniquely determined, and the display result of the normal symbol is "hit" and the gaming state is the time saving state, the normal symbol is displayed. When the fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined as the fluctuation pattern (FB1-1) per second when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1 second, the display result of the normal symbol is "hit" and the gaming state is other than the time saving state. Is a form in which the fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol is uniquely determined as a fluctuation pattern (FB1-2) per hit in which the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is 30 seconds. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2", and the normal symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

The normal symbol variation processing of 098SGS355 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. This normal symbol variation process includes a process of setting a variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the like. ing. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol reaches the normal fluctuation time, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the normal symbol fluctuation process ends.

The normal symbol stop processing of 098SGS356 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is "3". This normal symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 and making a setting for stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed normal symbol that is the display result of the normal symbol. ing. Then, when the display result is "hit", the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the display result is "off", the value of the normal map process flag is updated to "0".

The process of opening the normal electric accessory of 098SGS357 is executed when the value of the normal electric accessory opening is "4", and the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern is set. Then, a process of repeatedly changing the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) into an open state and a closed state is executed by driving the solenoid 81 based on the set ordinary electric accessory opening pattern.

In this feature unit 098SG, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (A), the normal electric accessory opening pattern of 1 is uniquely set based on the fact that the display result of the normal symbol is "hit". To. By setting the normal electric accessory opening pattern, the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) is placed in the open state for 2 seconds for 8 seconds three times and in the closed state for one second twice. Change.

Then, when the control to the open state and the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) based on the normal electric accessory opening pattern is completed, the value of the normal electric accessory process flag is updated to "0", which is normal. The processing during the opening of the electric accessory is completed.

By executing the normal symbol process process as described above, in this feature unit 098SG, when the display result of the normal symbol is "hit", the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) is always opened and closed ( Control to open and closed states) is completed in 8 seconds.

Further, as described above, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), when the last variable display in the time saving state ends, the timing at which the symbol determination period of the variable display ends. When the time saving flag was cleared and the last variable display of the time saving state was completed, the symbol determination period was the first period (0.5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, if a normal symbol hit occurs within the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the last second special symbol in the time-saving state, the game is played. The variable winning ball device 6B may be opened and closed until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed after the state is controlled to the normal state. At this time, the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (the game ball is placed in a state where the first variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is started and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. (Winning in the variable winning ball device 6B), the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to five times after the game state is controlled to the normal state, and the second special after the end of the time saving state. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display of the symbol becomes excessively high.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), the last variable display symbol determination period in the time-saving state is longer than the period during which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened / closed (ordinary electric accessory opening / closing period). It was considered to set it to seconds, but even in this case, if a normal symbol hit occurs within the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Since the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened and closed until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed later, the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state is the same as the conventional mode shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A). It was not possible to solve the problem that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display becomes excessively high.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), the last variable display symbol determination period in the time-saving state is set to open / close the normal electric accessory. In addition to setting it longer than the period, the time saving flag is cleared at the end timing of the last variable display in the time saving state. By doing so, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the variable display of the last second special symbol in the time saving state, the display result of the normal symbol is "hit (normal symbol hit)". In this case, the opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B is always completed during the symbol fixing period of 10 seconds or 12 seconds, that is, during the period when the second special figure holding memory is a maximum of four. That is, in the present feature unit 098SG, if the variable winning ball device 6B opens and closes during the symbol determination period immediately after the time reduction control is completed, the second special figure is suspended even if the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B. Only up to 4 memories can be stored, and after the first variable display of the 2nd special symbol is started after the game state is controlled to the normal state, a new 2nd special symbol hold memory can be generated. Since the characteristics are extremely low, it is possible to prevent the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state from becoming excessively high based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state as in the conventional pachinko gaming machine described above. It has become.

Next, the control executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

10-28 is a flowchart showing a part of the staging control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays an image of a panel corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed and the second special symbol hold storage after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B. Panel display effect processing (098SGS361) for executing a panel display effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit by displaying on 5, big hit A to big hit C when the gaming state is a normal state. The number of prize balls received from the CPU 103 between the time when the game state is controlled to one of the big hit game states and the time when the game state is controlled to the normal state and the four variable displays are started (hereinafter referred to as the consecutive villa period). The number of times the notification command and the effect process flag are controlled to the big hit game state (number of big hits) based on the number of times the notification command and the effect process flag are updated to the values corresponding to the effect process during the big hit, and the number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive villa period. The number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted in the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted (098SGS362), and the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted in the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls are displayed on the image display device 5. In order to update the background displayed on the result screen display process (098SG363) and the image display device 5 to a first background indicating that the gaming state is in the normal state and a second background image indicating that the gaming state is in the time saving state. Background image update process (098SGS364), variable display of the first second special symbol and variable display of the second and third second special symbols (second special symbol) in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed. (Variable display based on the first hold memory and variable display based on the second hold memory)) Notification effect processing (098SGS365), in order to execute an effect according to the effect mode being the second mode during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state when the effect mode described later is the second mode. 2nd mode compatible effect processing (098SGS366), V winning notification effect based on receiving the V winning notification designation command from the CPU 103 during the small hit game (based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch 098SG024B). V prize notification effect processing (098SGS367) for executing the effect of notifying that the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state), and the special effect for executing the stock effect and the meteor effect as the special effect in the present invention. Direction processing (098S GS368), after executing the right-handed notification effect processing (098SGS369) for executing the right-handed notification effect for instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the right game area (perform right-handed), S170. Any of the processes of S177 is executed.

FIG. 10-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the panel display effect processing (098SGS363) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the panel display effect processing shown in FIGS. 10-29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first panel display effect execution flag indicating that the panel display effect is being executed is set (. 098SGS371).

When the first panel display effect executing flag is not set (098SGS371; N), it is further determined whether or not the second panel display effect executing flag is set (098SGS371a). When the second panel display effect executing flag is set (098SGS371a; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS389, and when the second panel display effect executing flag is not set (098SGS371a; N), the effect mode is the first. It is determined whether or not the mode is set (098SGS372). In this feature unit 098SG, the first mode and the second mode are set in advance as the effect mode, and the first mode is a mode in which the panel display effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. Is. Further, in the second mode, it is notified that the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit by an effect different from the panel display effect (for example, by operating the push button 31B or the like) during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is a mode in which production) can be executed. These effect modes can be selected by operating the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A by the player at the end of the jackpot game described later. When the effect mode is set to the second mode, the effect control CPU 120 executes the above-mentioned second mode-compatible effect process (098SG366) to produce an effect different from the panel display effect (second mode-compatible effect). ) Can be executed.

When the effect mode is not the first mode (098SGS372; N), the panel display effect execution flag is terminated, while when the effect mode is the first mode (098SGS372; Y), the game state designation command is received. It is determined whether or not there is (098SGS373). Whether or not the game state designation command is received may be determined by whether or not the game state designation command reception flag is set.

If the game state designation command is not received (098SGS373; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game state designation command is received (098SGS373; Y), the received game state designation command is updated and stored (098SGS374).

Then, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command updated and stored in the process of 098SGS374 is the second game state designation command or the third game state designation command (098SGS375). When the game state specification command updated and stored in the process of 098SGS374 is the second game state specification command or the third game state specification command (098SGS375; Y), the first panel display effect executing flag is set and (098SGS376). ), The display of the panel display screen is started in the image display device 5 (098SGS377), and the panel display effect processing is completed. If the game state specification command updated and stored in the process of 098SGS374 is neither the second game state specification command nor the third game state specification command (098SGS375; N), the game state updated and stored in the process of 098SGS374 It is determined whether or not the designated command is the fifth game state designation command or the sixth game state designation command (098SGS376a).

When the game state specification command updated and stored in the process of 098SGS374 is the 5th game state specification command or the 6th game state specification command (098SGS376a; Y), the special figure variation time is 55000 ms PA3-4, PB3-. 3. It is determined whether or not any of the fluctuation pattern designation commands of PC3-3 is received (098SGS376b). When any of the fluctuation pattern specification commands of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 is received (098SGS376b; Y), the second panel display effect executing flag is set (098SGS376c), and the image display device. In 5, the display of the panel display screen is started (098SGS377), and the panel display effect processing is terminated.

When neither the 5th game state designation command nor the 6th game state designation command is stored (098SGS376a; N), any of the variation pattern designation commands of PA3-4, PB3-4, and PC3-3 is received. If not (098SGS376b; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated.

When the panel display effect executing flag is set (098SGS371; Y), the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 in the start winning command receive command buffer 098SG194A098SG194A indicates that the determination has been completed. It is determined whether or not 1 is set (098SGS379).

If 1 is not set in the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (098SGS379; N), the start winning command receive command buffer 098SG194A is checked (098SGS380), and the buffer number 2-0 is set. It is determined whether or not the entry has a memory of the symbol designation command (098SGS381). If the entry of the buffer number 2-0 does not store the symbol designation command (098SGS381; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the entry of the buffer number 2-0 stores the symbol designation command (098SGS381; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in 098SGS374 is the jackpot B (098SGS382).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A (098SGS382; N), the display pattern of the variable display corresponding panel is determined based on the symbol designation command stored in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 (098SGS383). In the processing of 098SGS383, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is changed according to whether the symbol specification command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 indicates a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. Determined at a different ratio from 1 to pattern PN-4.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (A), when the symbol designation command indicates a big hit, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be the pattern PN-1 at a rate of 0%. Then, the pattern PN-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, the pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the symbol designation command indicates a small hit, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 20%, and to pattern PN-2 at a rate of 30%. , 50% to pattern PN-3 and 10% to pattern PN-4. Then, when the symbol designation command indicates an error, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 55%, and to pattern PN-2 at a rate of 34%. The pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (B), the pattern PN-1 is a display pattern for displaying the image of the character A on the image display device 5, and the pattern PN-2 is the character B on the image display device 5. The pattern PN-3 is a display pattern for displaying the image of the character C on the image display device 5, and the pattern PN-4 is a display pattern for displaying the image of the character D on the image display device 5. It is a display pattern to be performed.

That is, in the feature unit 098SG, when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as the variable display corresponding panel, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is set to be the highest. When the character C is displayed on the display device 5, the jackpot expectation is set to be the next highest after the character D is displayed, and when the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It is set low (expected jackpot for each character displayed on the image display device 5 as a corresponding panel during variable display: character D> character C> character B> character A).

Returning to FIG. 10-29, after the execution of 098SGS383, the effect control CPU 120 sets 1 to the panel pattern determined flag in the buffer number 2-0 (098SGS384), and the panel corresponding to the variable display of the determined display pattern. After starting the display on the image display device 5 (098SGS385), the process proceeds to 098SGS395.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS382; Y), 1 is set in the panel pattern determined flag in the buffer number 2-0 (098SGS386), and the time is shortened after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed. After starting the display of the corresponding character D-compatible panel on the image display device 5 (098SGS387), the process proceeds to 098SGS395.

Further, when 1 is set in the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (098SGS379; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in 098SGS374 is jackpot B (098SGS388). ). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (098SGS388; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS395 as it is, while if the jackpot type is not jackpot B (098SGS388; N), the start winning command buffer 098SG194A is checked (098SGS389). ), It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command is stored in any of the entries corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (098SGS390). If there is no entry for the second special figure hold storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (098SGS390; N), the process proceeds to 098SGS395 as it is. On the other hand, when there is an entry for the second special figure hold storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (098SGS390; Y), "1" indicating that the determination has been made is set in the panel pattern determined flag of the entry. It is determined whether or not it is present (098SGS391).

If the panel pattern determined flag is set (098SGS391; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS395 as it is. On the other hand, when the panel pattern determined flag is not set (098SGS391; N), the display pattern of the second special figure hold storage compatible panel is determined based on the symbol specification command stored in the entry (098SGS392). ), Set the panel pattern determined flag of the entry to 1 (098SGS393). Then, the display of the second special figure reservation storage corresponding panel in the display pattern determined in the process of 098SGS393 is started (098SGS394), and the process proceeds to 098SGS395.

In the processing of 098SGS392, the display pattern of the second special figure holding storage compatible panel may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-30 (A) (the same ratio as the processing of 098SGS383). In the processing of 098SGS383 and the processing of 098SGS392, the display pattern of the panel corresponding to variable display and the display pattern of the panel corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage may be determined at different ratios.

In 098SGS395, the process data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set at the start of the variable display during execution is checked (098SGS395). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the panel display effect (098SGS396), and if it is not the end timing (098SGS396; N), the panel display effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is the end timing (098SGS396; Y), the display of the panel display screen and the display of each panel in the image display device 5 are ended (098SGS397), and the panel display effect executing flag is cleared (098SGS397). 098SGS398), the panel display effect executing flag is terminated.

FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the result screen display process (098SGS365) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the result screen display process shown in FIGS. 10-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the effect mode is set to the first mode (098SGS400). When the effect mode is the second mode (098SGS400; N), the result screen display process is terminated, and when the effect mode is the first mode (098SGS400; Y), whether or not the result screen display timer is operating. (098SGS401).

When the result screen display timer is not operating (098SGS401; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command is received (098SGS402).

If the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command is not received (098SGS402; N), the result screen display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command is received (098SGS402; Y), the value corresponding to the time of 21.5 seconds is set in the result screen display period timer and the timer count (timer operation). (098SGS405), the number of big hits and the number of winning prize balls counted by the number of big hits / winning prize balls counting process, that is, the number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state during the above-mentioned consecutive villa period and the consecutive villa period. The display of the result screen including the number of prize balls paid out is started (098SGS406), the special effect determination flag is set (098SGS406a), and the result screen display process is completed.

The 21.5 seconds set in the result screen display period timer in 098SGS405 are the 7th variable display symbol confirmation period (12 seconds) of the 7th variable display in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot D is completed. Up to 4 variable display periods (2 seconds x 4) of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction state, and 3 variable display period of the second special symbol after the end of the time reduction state (0.5) It is a period based on the sum of seconds x 3).

Further, when the result screen display timer is operating (098SGS401; Y), after the result screen display period timer is decremented and updated by 1 (098SGS407), the stock effect execution indicating that the stock effect described later is being executed is executed. It is determined whether or not the medium flag is set (098SGS407a). When the stock effect executing flag is set (098SGS407a; Y), the value of the result screen display period timer is set to 0 (timer out of the result screen display period timer) and the process proceeds to 098SGS409 (098SGS407b).

Further, when the stock effect executing flag is not set (098SGS407a; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 1, that is, whether or not it is the start timing of the variable display (. 098SGS407c). When the value of the effect control process flag is other than 1 (098SGS407c; N), the process proceeds to 098SGS408, and when the value of the effect control process flag is 1 (098SGS407c; Y), the variation pattern is 50000 ms. It is determined whether or not the PB3-2 is a reach jackpot or the PC3-2 is a reach small hit with a special figure variation time of 50,000 ms (098SGS407d). When the variation pattern is PB3-2 or PC3-2 (098SGS407d; Y), the above-mentioned processes of 098SGS407b and 098SGS409 are executed to end the result screen display process, and the variation patterns are PB3-2 and PC3-2. If neither is the case (098SGS407d; N), it is determined whether or not the result screen display timer has timed out (098SGS408).

If the result screen display timer is not timer-out (098SGS408; N), the result screen display process is terminated, and if the result screen display timer is timer-out (098SGS408; N), the process proceeds to 098SGS409.

Then, the 098SGS409 ends the display of the result screen and ends the result screen display process (098SGS409).

That is, in this feature unit 098SG, the variable display result does not become a small hit or a big hit in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E (V winning does not occur even if it becomes a small hit), and the time saving state is When finished, the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the time saving state of the jackpot E, the result screen is displayed even when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed seven times even in the time saving state. Then, the result screen ends when 21.5 seconds elapse, the stock effect is executed within the 21.5 seconds, or the variable display of the big hit or the small hit is started.

10-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the background image update process shown in FIG. 10-28. In the background image update process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the game state by the value of the remaining second special figure time reduction number of times, the value of the effect control process flag, and the like (098SGS411).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state (098SGS412).

In the case of either the big hit game state or the small hit game state (098SGS412; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while in the case of neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state (098SGS412; N). Further, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which the time saving control is not performed (098SGS413).

When the specified gaming state is the normal state (098SGS413; Y), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being variablely displayed (098SGS413a). Whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed may be determined by, for example, whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A. .. When the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress (098SGS413a; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is not in progress (098SGS413a; N), the hold storage of the second special symbol is stored. It is determined whether or not there is (098SGS413b). Whether or not there is a hold storage of the second special symbol may be determined based on whether or not each command is stored in the entry of buffer number 2-1 of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A.

When there is a hold storage of the second special symbol (098SGS413b; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and when there is no hold storage of the second special symbol (098SGS413b; N), the first background image is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is inside (098SGS414). When the first background image is being displayed (098SGS414; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while when the first background image is not being displayed (098SGS414; N), the background image is used as the first background. After the update is displayed on the image (098SGS415), the background image update process is terminated. As a result, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first background image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, when the specified gaming state is not a normal state (098SGS413; N), it is determined whether or not the second background image is being displayed (098SGS424). Then, when the second background image is being displayed (098SGS424; Y), the background image update process is terminated, while when the second background image is not being displayed (098SGS424; N), the background image is displayed. 2 After updating to the background image (098SGS425), the background image update process is terminated.

FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing an example of the special effect processing (098SGS368) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the special effect process shown in FIGS. 10-33, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the execution of the stock effect, but is executing the stock effect start waiting flag or the stock effect indicating that it is before the execution timing of the stock effect. It is determined whether or not the stock effect executing flag indicating that the above is in the ON state (098SGS611).

When either the stock effect start waiting flag or the stock effect executing flag is on (098SGS611; Y), the process proceeds to the stock effect process (098SGS628), while the stock effect start wait flag and the stock effect execution flag are displayed. When none of them is in the ON state (098SGS611; N), the second meteor effect start waiting flag or the second meteor effect start waiting flag indicating that the execution of the second meteor effect is determined but before the execution timing of the second meteor effect is further performed. It is determined whether or not the second meteor effect executing flag indicating that the second meteor effect is being executed is on (098SGS612).

When the second meteor effect start waiting flag or the second meteor effect executing flag is on (098SGS612; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS649 in FIGS. 10-35, while the second meteor effect executing flag is on. If not (098SGS612; N), it is determined whether or not the first meteor effect executing flag indicating that the first meteor effect is being executed is on (098SGS613).

When the first meteor effect executing flag is on (098SGS613; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS641 in FIGS. 10-35 to execute the first meteor effect based on the meteor effect process data, while the first one. When the meteor effect executing flag is not in the ON state (098SGS613; N), it is determined whether or not the special effect determination flag is in the ON state (098SGS614).

When the special effect determination flag is not on (098SGS614; N), the special effect process is terminated, while when the special effect determination flag is on (098SGS614; Y), the special effect determination flag is terminated. After changing to the off state (098SGS615), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation 2 command is received, that is, whether or not it is the 7th variable display confirmation display period in the time saving state after the big hit D ( 098SGS616).

When the symbol confirmation 2 command is not received (098SGS616; N), that is, when the symbol confirmation 3 command is received, the process proceeds to 098SGS629 in FIGS. 10-34 to determine the execution of the meteor effect or the stock effect. .. Since the special effect determination flag is turned on only when the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command is received in the above-mentioned 098SGS401, the symbol confirmation 2 command is not received in the 098SGS616. In this case, it is only when the symbol confirmation 3 command is received.

On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation 2 command is received (098SGS616; Y), the start winning reception command buffer 098SG194A is checked (098SGS617), and is there a second special symbol hold memory of hit (big hit or small hit)? It is determined whether or not (098SGS618).

If there is no second special figure holding memory for hitting (098SGS618; N), the special effect process is terminated, while if there is a second special figure holding memory for hitting (098SGS618; Y), the special effect to be executed is executed. It is determined by lottery whether the type of the image is a meteor effect or a stock effect (098SGS619).

In this lottery, different ratios are set as the lottery ratio between the meteor effect and the stock effect according to the type of hit, and when the type of hit is a small hit, the meteor effect is decided by lottery. While the ratio is high and the ratio of stock production is determined by lottery is low, when the type of hit is a big hit, the ratio of meteor production is determined by lottery is low and the ratio of stock production is determined by lottery is low. In addition, even if the type of hit is a small hit, the stock effect may be decided by lottery, and even if the type of hit is a big hit, the meteor effect is decided by lottery, although it is a low rate. May be done.

Therefore, in this feature unit 098SG, the expectation (reliability) that the stock production is a big hit than the meteor production is higher, and the expectation (reliability) that the meteor production is a small hit than the stock production. Although the lottery ratio is set so as to be high, the present invention is not limited to this, and the expectation (reliability) that the stock production is a small hit than the meteor production is expected to be the lottery ratio. ) Is high, and the meteor effect may be set to have a higher expectation (reliability) for a big hit than the stock effect. If the type of hit is a small hit, the stock effect will be drawn by lottery. If it is not decided, that is, if it is a stock effect, the lottery ratio may be set so that the big hit is confirmed, or if the type of hit is a big hit, the meteor effect is not decided by lottery, that is, in the meteor effect. If so, the lottery ratio may be set so that the small hit is confirmed.

Further, the feature unit 098SG exemplifies a mode in which one of the meteor effect and the stock effect is always determined by lottery when there is a second special figure holding memory of the hit. It is not limited, and even if there is a second special figure hold memory for each of these, neither the meteor effect nor the stock effect special effect will be decided by lottery (that is, non-execution) at a certain rate. The lottery ratio may be set as in the lottery), and even if there is no second special figure hold memory of the hit, the execution of the meteor effect is decided by lottery at a low ratio. May be good.

After the type of these special effects is determined by lottery, it is determined whether or not the meteor effect is determined by lottery (098SGS620).

If the meteor effect has not been decided by lottery, that is, if the stock effect has been decided by lottery (098SGS620; N), the stock effect start waiting flag is turned on (098SGS620a), and the stock effect wait timer is set to the stock effect. The timer value corresponding to the period up to the start timing is set (098SGS620b), and the special effect process is terminated.

It should be noted that these stock effect start waiting timers are executed by executing the stock effect process of 098SGS628 for each timer interrupt, so that it is determined whether or not the stock effect process is subtracted and updated and the timer is up, and the stock effect start. When the wait timer goes up, the stock effect start wait flag is turned off and the stock effect execution flag is turned on, the stock effect process table is set, and the stock effect process timer is started. When the stock effect is started and the stock effect execution flag is turned on, the stock effect process of 098SGS628 is executed every time the timer is interrupted, so that the stock effect becomes the stock effect process table and the stock effect process timer. Based on this, it will proceed until the execution period of the stock production has elapsed.

On the other hand, when the meteor effect is decided by lottery (098SGS620; Y), the execution timing of the meteor effect is further decided by lottery. Specifically, at the start of the 7th variable display fixed display period (fixed display timing; first meteor effect) in the time-saving state due to the jackpot D, and at the start of the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory that is a hit. (098SGS621) is decided by lottery for any of (hit variable display start timing; second meteor effect).

In this feature unit 098SG, different ratios are set as lottery ratios between the confirmed display timing and the winning variable display start timing according to the type of hit, and when the type of hit is a small hit, the confirmed display is displayed. While the rate at which the timing (first meteor effect) is decided by lottery is high and the rate at which the hit variable display start timing (second meteor effect) is decided by lottery is low, the confirmation display is made when the type of hit is a big hit. The rate at which the timing (first meteor effect) is determined by lottery is low, and the rate at which the variable display start timing (second meteor effect) is determined by lottery is high.

Therefore, in this feature unit 098SG, the case where the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed at the variable hit display start timing is a big hit than the case where the meteor effect (first meteor effect) is executed at the definite display timing. The expectation (reliability) is high, and the meteor effect (first meteor effect) is executed at the definite display timing than the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed at the variable display start timing. The lottery ratio is set so that the expectation (reliability) of a small hit is high, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these lottery ratios, for example, the type of hit is a small hit. In this case, the winning variable display start timing (second meteor effect) is not determined by lottery, that is, if the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed at the variable display start timing, the relevant case is concerned. You may set the lottery so that it will always be a big hit in the variable display, or the expectation (reliability) that the second meteor effect (hit variable display start timing) will be a small hit than the first meteor effect (confirmed display timing). The lottery ratio is set so that the first meteor effect (confirmed display timing) has a higher expectation (reliability) for a big hit than the second meteor effect (hit variable display start timing). Therefore, the expectation (reliability) that the big hit may be higher if the meteor staging is executed at an early stage from the end of the seventh variable display in the time saving state.

In the feature unit 098SG, the execution timing of the meteor effect is set to either the definite display timing or the hit variable display start timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meteor is not limited to these timings. A special effect pattern for executing the effect may be provided. In this case, the jackpot expectation (reliability) of the special effect pattern is the jackpot expectation (reliability) of either the first meteor effect or the second meteor effect. The lottery may be set so as to be higher than (for example, 100%).

After the execution timing of the meteor effect is determined by lottery in this way, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the definite display timing (098SGS622).

When the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is not the definite display timing, that is, when the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the hit variable display start timing (second meteor effect) (098SGS622; N), the first The period (waiting period) until the variable display executed based on the second special figure hold storage of the hit is started while the 2 meteor effect start waiting flag is turned on (098SGS622a) is specified, and the period is specified. The timer value corresponding to (waiting period) is set in the second meteor effect start waiting timer (098SGS622b), and the special effect process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the final display timing (098SGS622; Y), the first meteor effect executing flag is turned on (098SGS623) in order to immediately start the first meteor effect. ), After setting the timer value corresponding to the execution period of the meteor effect (same for the first meteor effect and the second meteor effect) in the meteor effect period timer (098SGS624), select and execute the process table of the meteor effect. While setting it as a process table (098SGS625), a meteor effect process timer for advancing the meteor effect based on the set meteor effect process table is started (098SGS626), and the first process data in the meteor effect process table is started. After controlling the contents and starting the meteor effect (first meteor effect) (098SGS627), the special effect process ends.

If it is determined in the above-mentioned 098SGS616 that the symbol confirmation 2 command is not received in the case where the symbol confirmation 3 command is received, the process proceeds to 098SGS629 in FIGS. 10-34 and the start winning command is received. Buffer 098SG194A is checked (098SGS629) to determine if there is a second special figure hold storage for a hit (big hit or small hit) (098SGS630).

If there is no second special figure hold memory for hit (big hit or small hit) (098SGS630; N), the stock effect start wait flag is turned on (098SGS630a), and the stock effect start wait timer starts the stock effect. The timer value corresponding to the period up to the timing is set (098SGS630b), and the special effect processing is terminated. In this way, in the case of the 7th variable display of the time saving state by the big hit E, since the big hit or the small hit is almost certainly performed by the continuous time saving state after that, the second special figure of the hit is suspended. Even if there is no memory, it is suggested that the stock effect will almost certainly be a big hit or a small hit.

On the other hand, if there is a second special figure hold memory of a hit (big hit or small hit) (098SGS630; Y), it is decided by lottery whether the type of special effect to be executed is a meteor effect or a stock effect. (098SGS631).

In the present feature unit 098SG, the setting of the determination ratio of the type of special effect in these 098SGS631 is the same as the determination ratio in the above-mentioned 098SGS619, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the 098SGS631. The determination ratio of the type of special effect may be different from the determination ratio in 098SGS619.

Then, after the type of special effect is determined by lottery, it is determined whether or not the meteor effect is determined by lottery (098SGS632).

If the meteor effect has not been decided by lottery (098SGS632; N), the stock effect start wait flag is turned on (098SGS630a), and the stock effect start wait timer is set to the timer corresponding to the period until the start timing of the stock effect. Set the value (098SGS630b) and end the special effect processing.

On the other hand, when the meteor effect is decided by lottery (098SGS632; Y), the execution timing of the meteor effect is set to the above-mentioned fixed display timing (first meteor effect) and variable display start timing (second meteor effect). It is decided by lottery which one to use (098SGS633). In addition, in this feature part 098SG, the ratio setting of the lottery decision in these 098SGS633 is the same as the ratio setting of the lottery decision in 098SGS621 described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery in 098SGS633 is not limited to this. The percentage setting of the decision may be different from the percentage setting of the lottery decision in 098SGS621.

After the execution timing of the meteor effect is determined by lottery in this way, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the final display timing (098SGS624).

When the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is not the definite display timing, that is, when the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the hit variable display start timing (second meteor effect) (098SGS634; N), the first 2 Turn on the meteor effect start waiting flag (098SGS634a), specify the period (waiting period) until the variable display executed based on the second special figure hold storage is started, and specify the period. The timer value corresponding to (waiting period) is set in the second meteor effect start waiting timer (098SGS634b), and the special effect process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the execution timing of the meteor effect determined by lottery is the final display timing (098SGS634; Y), the first meteor effect executing flag is turned on (098SGS635) in order to immediately start the first meteor effect. ), After setting the timer value corresponding to the execution period of the meteor effect in the meteor effect period timer (098SGS636), the process table of the meteor effect is selected and set as the process table to be executed (098SGS637), and the set meteor. The meteor effect process timer for advancing the meteor effect based on the process table of the effect is started (098SGS638), and the content of the first process data in the process table of the meteor effect is controlled to control the meteor effect (first meteor effect). ) Is started (098SGS639), and the special production process is terminated.

Further, when the first meteor effect executing flag is in the ON state, it is determined in the above-mentioned 098SGS613 that the first meteor effect executing flag is in the ON state, and the process proceeds to 098SGS641 in FIGS. 10-35 to proceed to the meteor effect process. After setting the timer to -1 and setting the meteor effect period timer to -1 (098SGS642), it is determined whether or not the meteor effect period timer has timed out (098SGS643).

If the meteor effect period timer is out of the timer (098SGS643; Y), the meteor effect in progress flag is updated to the off state (098SGS648) to end the special effect process, while the meteor effect period timer is out of the timer. If not (098SGS643; N), it is further determined whether or not the meteor staging process timer is out of the timer (098SGS644).

Then, when the meteor effect process timer is not timer-out (098SGS644; N), the control content of the meteor effect process data is executed without switching the meteor effect process data (098SGS647), and then the special effect process is terminated. do. On the other hand, when the meteor effect process timer is out of time (098SGS644; Y), after switching to the next meteor effect process data (098SGS645), the next meteor effect process timer is started (098SGS646). After executing the control content of the next meteor effect process data that has been switched (098SGS647), the special effect process is terminated. In this way, by switching the meteor effect process data and executing it sequentially, the meteor effect is advanced based on the meteor effect process data.

When the second meteor effect start waiting flag or the second meteor effect executing flag is on, the second meteor effect start waiting flag or the second meteor effect executing flag is on in the above-mentioned 098SGS612. Then, the process proceeds to 098SGS649 in FIGS. 10-35, and it is further determined whether or not the second meteor staging executing flag is in the ON state.

When the second meteor effect executing flag is in the ON state (098SGS649; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS641 described above, and the processes of 098SGS641 to 098SGS648 are sequentially executed. The second meteor production is executed.

On the other hand, when the second meteor effect executing flag is not on (098SGS649; N), that is, when the second meteor effect start wait flag is on, after the second meteor effect start wait timer is set to -1. (098SGS650), it is determined whether or not the second meteor staging start waiting timer has timed out (098SGS651).

When the second meteor effect start waiting timer is not timered out (098SGS651; N), the special effect process is terminated, while when the second meteor effect start waiting timer is timered out (098SGS651; Y). ), The second meteor effect start waiting flag is turned off (098SGS652), the second meteor effect executing flag is turned on (098SGS653), and the timer value corresponding to the meteor effect execution period is set in the meteor effect period timer. After setting (098SGS654), the process table for the meteor effect is selected and set as a process table to be executed (098SGS655), and the meteor effect process timer for advancing the meteor effect based on the set process table for the meteor effect. (098SGS656), the content of the first process data in the process table of the meteor effect is controlled to start the meteor effect (second meteor effect) (098SGS657), and then the special effect process ends.

FIG. 10-36 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 10-36, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the first variable display start command is received. (098SGS431). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (098SGS431; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 098SG194A are set. Various command data stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (098SGS432). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set (098SGS431; N), whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, the second variable display start command is received. It is determined whether or not it has been done (098SGS433). When the second variable display start command reception flag is set (098SGS433; Y), the buffer numbers “2-0” to “2-4” of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 098SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (098SGS434). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (098SGS433; N), the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing 098SGS432 or 098SGS434, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (098SGS435), and stops the decorative symbol according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area. Is determined (098SGS436).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal state (098SGS437). Whether or not the gaming state is the normal state may be determined based on whether or not the number of remaining time reductions specified from the received second special figure time reduction number notification command is 0 or the like.

When the gaming state is the normal state (098SGS437; Y), the variation pattern read from the variation pattern designation command storage area is further executed based on the second hold storage at the end of the time saving state. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of PA3-1 is determined when the variable display of is (098SGS437a).

In the case of the variation pattern of PA3-1 (098SGS437a; Y), the process table corresponding to the pending digestion variation after the end of working hours is selected (098SGS437b), and then the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of PA3-1 (098SGS437a; N), the advance notice effect determination process (098SGS438) for determining the execution of the advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display is executed. After that, the process table corresponding to the variation pattern read from the variation pattern specification command storage area is selected (098SGS445), and the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

On the other hand, when the game state is not the normal state but the time saving state (098SGS437; N), whether or not the second game state designation command is stored in the game state designation command updated and stored in the panel display effect processing 098SGS374. That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is completed (098SGS441). Then, when the second game state designation command is stored (098SGS441; Y), the process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the second special figure time reduction number of one is selected (098SGS442). Proceed to 098SGS448.

If the second game state designation command is not stored (098SGS441; N), whether or not the third game state designation command is stored, that is, the jackpot that triggered the time saving state is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is B (whether or not the game state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed) (098SGS443). Then, when the third game state designation command is stored (098SGS443; Y), the fluctuation pattern is PA3-3 (out of reach) and PB3-2 (reach hit) in which the variable display time is 50 seconds. ), PC3-2 (reach small hit) or not (098SGS443a).

If the variation pattern is any of PA3-3 (out of reach), PB3-2 (reach big hit), and PC3-2 (reach small hit) (098SGS443a; Y), the variation pattern and the second feature of 3 times. After selecting the process table (process table for success / failure notification effect) corresponding to the first time reduction in the figure, proceed to (098SGS442) and 098SGS448, while PA3-3 (out of reach), PB3-2 (reach jackpot), PC3- If it is not any of the fluctuation patterns of 2 (reach small hit) (098SGS443a; N), after selecting the fluctuation pattern and the process table for continuation according to the second and third times of the second special figure time reduction of three times. (098SGS444), proceed to 098SGS448.

Further, when the third game state designation command is not stored (098SGS443; N), it is determined whether or not the target variable display of the second meteor effect is performed (098SGS444a). Whether or not the target of the second meteor effect is variable display depends on whether or not it is PB3-2 (reach big hit) or PC3-2 (reach small hit) in which the flag during the second meteor effect is turned on. It can be determined.

In the case of the variable display of the target of the second meteor effect (098SGS444a; Y), after selecting the process table according to the execution of the second meteor effect and the fluctuation pattern (098SGS444b), the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

If the target variable display of the second meteor effect is not (098SGS444a; N), the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is selected (098SGS444c), and the process proceeds to 098SGS448.

In 098SGS448, the staging control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table.

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (098SGS449). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 098SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (098SGS450). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (098SGS451). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (098SGS452).

In the variable display effect processing, the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, the control of the staging device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative symbol is realized according to the value of the variable display control timer as described above, and the decorative symbol is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. The variable display of the above may be stopped and the value of the effect control process flag may be set to the value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (S173).

FIG. 10-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure hit waiting process (S173) executed by the staging control CPU 120. In the special figure hit waiting process shown in FIGS. 10-37, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period effect executing flag is on (098SGS661). If the symbol determination period effect executing flag is in the ON state (098SGS661; Y), the process proceeds to 098SGS691 shown in FIGS. 10-38.

On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation period effect executing flag is off (098SGS661; N), the symbol confirmation period effect execution flag is turned on (098SGS662), and then the symbol confirmation 1 command reception flag is on. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 1 command (098SGS663).

When the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 1 command (098SGS663; Y), it is further determined whether or not the terminated variable display variation pattern is PA3-3 (098SGS664).

When the variation pattern of the completed variable display is PA3-3 (098SGS664; Y), it is a process table for executing the symbol confirmation period effect according to the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds at the time of the first hit. After selecting the symbol confirmation period effect process table (098SGS665), the symbol determination period effect process timer is started (098SGS666), and the content of the first process data in the symbol determination period effect process table for the first hit is controlled. (098SGS667), after starting the symbol fixing period production for the first hit, the waiting process for hitting the special figure is completed.

Further, when the variation pattern of the completed variable display is not PA3-3 (098SGS664; N), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the terminated variable display is PA3-1 (098SGS668).

When the finished variable display variation pattern is PA3-1 (098SGS668; Y), the process for executing the non-time saving state symbol confirmation period effect according to the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. After selecting the symbol fixing period effect process table for the second special symbol variable display in the non-time saving state (098SGS669), the symbol fixing period effect process timer is started (098SGS670), and the second special figure variable display in the non-time saving state is used. After controlling the content of the first process data in the symbol confirmation period effect process table (098SGS671), starting the symbol determination period effect for the second special symbol variable display in the non-time saving state, the waiting process for hitting the special symbol ends. ..

If the finished variable display fluctuation pattern is not PA3-1 (098SGS668; N), whether the finished variable display fluctuation pattern is PA3-2, PB, or PC. (098SGS672).

When the variation pattern of the completed variable display is PA3-2 or any variation pattern of PB3 (PB3-1 to PB3-3) or PC3 (PC3-1 to PC3-3), (098SGS672; Y). ), The time-saving state second special symbol variable display symbol confirmation period production process table, which is a process table for executing the time-saving state symbol confirmation period effect according to the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds, was selected. Later (098SGS673), the symbol confirmation period effect process timer was started (098SGS674), and the content of the first process data in the symbol determination period effect process table for the second special figure variable display in the time saving state was controlled (098SGS675). Time saving state After starting the second special figure variable display symbol confirmation period effect, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

Further, when the variation pattern of the completed variable display is not PA3-2 or any variation pattern of PB3 (PB3-1 to PB3-3) or PC3 (PC3-1 to PC3-3) (098SGS672; N). ), That is, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the first special symbol variable display which is a process table for executing the symbol determination period effect according to the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds. After selecting the symbol confirmation period effect process table (098SGS676), the symbol determination period effect process timer is started (098SGS677), and the content of the first process data in the first special symbol variable display symbol determination period effect process table is controlled. (098SGS678), the first special figure variable display symbol determination period effect is started, and then the special figure hit waiting process is completed.

On the other hand, if the received symbol confirmation command is not the symbol confirmation 1 command (098SGS663; N), whether or not the symbol confirmation 2 command reception flag is on, that is, the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 2 command. Whether or not it is determined (098SGS679).

When the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 2 command (098SGS679; Y), the process for executing the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state of the jackpot D according to the symbol confirmation period of 12 seconds. After selecting the symbol confirmation period effect process table for the end of the time saving state, which is a table (098SGS680), the symbol determination period effect process timer is started (098SGS681), and the first process data in the symbol determination period effect process table for the end of the time reduction state After controlling the contents (098SGS682) and starting the effect of the symbol determination period for the end of the time saving state, the waiting process for hitting the special figure is ended.

Further, when the received symbol confirmation command is not the symbol confirmation 2 command (098SGS679; N), that is, when the received symbol confirmation command is the symbol confirmation 3 command, the symbol confirmation period is 12 seconds. After selecting the time-saving state continuation symbol confirmation period effect process table (098SGS683), which is the process table for executing the time-saving state continuation symbol confirmation period effect of the jackpot E, the symbol confirmation period effect process timer is started (098SGS684). , Control the content of the first process data in the time-saving state continuation symbol confirmation period effect process table (098SGS685), start the time-saving state continuation symbol determination period effect, and then end the special figure hit wait process.

Further, in 098SGS691 of FIG. 10-38, which proceeds when the symbol fixing period effect executing flag is on, the symbol confirmation period effect process timer is set to -1. Then, the symbol determination period effect period timer is set to -1 (098SGS692), and it is determined whether or not the symbol determination period effect period timer has timed out (098SGS693).

When the symbol fixing period effect period timer is not timer-out (098SGS693; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol determination period effect process timer is timer-out (098SGS694).

Then, when the symbol fixing period effect process timer is not timer-out (098SGS694; N), the control content of the symbol determination period effect process data is executed without switching the symbol determination period effect process data (098SGS697). , Ends the waiting process for hitting the special figure.

On the other hand, when the symbol confirmation period effect process timer is out of timer (098SGS694; Y), after switching to the next symbol determination period effect process data (098SGS695), the next symbol determination period effect process timer (098SGS696), the control content of the next symbol determination period effect process data to be switched is executed (098SGS697), and then the waiting process for hitting the special figure is terminated.

If the symbol confirmation period effect period timer is out (098SGS693; Y), the symbol confirmation period effect execution flag is turned off (098SGS698), and then whether or not a hit start designation command indicating a big hit is received. (098SGS699).

When the hit start designation command indicating a big hit is received (098SGS699; Y), the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (098SGS700), and the special figure hit wait process is terminated. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command indicating a big hit has not been received (098SGS699; N), it is determined whether or not the hit start designation command indicating a small hit has been received (098SGS701). When the hit start designation command indicating a small hit is received (098SGS701; Y), the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (098SGS702), and the special figure hit wait process is terminated. .. On the other hand, if the hit start designation command indicating a small hit has not been received (098SGS701; N), the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (098SGS703), and the special figure hit wait. End the process.

FIG. 10-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the right-handed notification effect processing (098SGS369) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the right-handed notification effect processing shown in FIGS. 10-39, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the third right-handed notification image is being displayed (098SGS711), and is displaying the second right-handed notification image. Whether or not (098SGS712) and whether or not the first right-handed notification image is being displayed (098SGS713) are sequentially determined.

When none of the right-handed notification images is displayed (098SGS713; N), it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (098SGS714). Whether or not it is in the time saving state may be determined by whether or not the remaining time saving number specified from the received second special figure time saving number notification command is not 0.

If it is not in the time saving state (098SGS714; N), the right-handed notification effect processing is terminated, while if it is in the time saving state (098SGS714; Y), whether or not the effect control process flag is "0". That is, a state in which the time is shortened and the first variable display start waiting process is being executed (that is, the hold storage of the second special symbol is not yet stored, and there is no prize in the second start winning opening. ) (098SGS715).

When the effect control process flag is "0" (098SGS715; Y), as shown in FIGS. 10-51, the display of the first right-handed notification image, which is the right-handed notification image of medium size, is started. (098SGS716).

Further, when the effect control process flag is not "0" (098SGS715; N), that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started by winning the second start winning opening, the execution is executed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is any of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (098SGS717).

When the variation pattern being executed is any of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (098SGS717; Y), the display of the first right-handed notification image is terminated and (098SGS718). ), As shown in FIG. 10-51, the display of the second right-handed notification image having a size larger than that of the first right-handed notification image (right-handed notification image having a large size) is started (098SGS719). The right-handed notification effect processing ends.

If the executed variation pattern is not any of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (098SGS717; N), is the variable display the last variable display in the time saving state? Whether or not, that is, whether or not it is the last variable display in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A to jackpot C is determined (098SGS720). Whether or not it is the last variable display of the time saving state is determined by receiving the second game state designation command, the third game state designation command, and the fourth game state designation command, and the remaining second special figure time reduction number of notifications. It can be determined by whether or not the remaining second special figure time reduction number specified from the command is 1.

When the variable display is the last variable display in the time saving state (098SGS720), it is further determined whether or not the value of the staging control process flag is 3, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display (. 098SGS721). When the value of the effect control process flag is 3 (098SGS721; Y), the display of the first right-handed notification image is terminated (098SGS722), and the right-handed notification effect process is terminated. When the variable display is not the last variable display in the time saving state (098SGS720; N) and when the value of the effect control process flag is not 3 (098SGS721; N), the right-handed notification effect process is terminated.

Further, while the second right-handed notification image is being displayed (098SGS712; Y), it is determined whether or not the reach timing is reached (098SGS723). Whether or not the reach timing is reached may be specified from the contents of the process data being executed.

In the case of reach timing (098SGS723; Y), the display of the second right-handed notification image is terminated (098SGS724), and as shown in FIG. 10-51, the size is smaller than the above-mentioned first right-handed notification image (098SGS723; Y). The display of the third right-handed notification image (098SGS725), which is a small-sized right-handed notification image), is started (098SGS725), and the right-handed notification effect processing is completed.

If it is not the reach timing (098SGS723; N), the start winning command buffer 098SG194A is checked (098SGS726), and it is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number has reached 4, which is the maximum number. (098SGS727). When the number of second special figure reserved storage is 3 or less (098SGS727; N), the right-handed notification effect processing is terminated, and when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 4 (098SGS727; Y), the second right The display of the striking notification image is terminated (098SGS728), the display of the third right striking notification image is started (098SGS729), and the right striking notification effect processing is terminated.

Further, during the display of the third right-handed notification image (098SGS711; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 3, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display (098SGS730). .. When the value of the effect control process flag is not 3 (098SGS371; N), the right-handed notification effect process is terminated, and when the value of the effect control process flag is 3 (098SGS731; Y), the third right-handed notification image is displayed. Is finished (098SGS371), and the right-handed notification effect processing is finished.

That is, in the present feature unit 098SG, when the time saving state is controlled after the big hit game is completed, the image display device 5 first starts displaying the first right-handed notification image. When the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of any one of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C, the first right-handed notification is based on the end of the last variable display of the time saving state. The image display ends.

On the other hand, when the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit D or big hit E is completed, the first right-handed notification image is displayed based on the start of the seventh variable display of the time saving state. Instead of, the display of the second right-handed notification image on the image display device 5 is started. While the second right-handed notification image is being displayed, the display of the third right-handed image is switched to when the number of reserved second special figures is four, which is the maximum number, or when the reach timing is reached. The display of the third right-handed image ends based on the end of the variable display.

By executing each process by the effect control CPU 120 as described above, as shown in FIG. 10-40, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. In that case, if there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol ends and the game state becomes the normal state. When controlled, after the symbol confirmation period of 12 seconds, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed four times with the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds in between. In addition, the symbol confirmation period of 12 seconds, the variable display period of the second special symbol for 2 seconds each for 4 times, and the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the second special symbol for 0.5 seconds each are completed are 21.5. In seconds, the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5. In the symbol fixing period, the symbol fixing period effect for ending the time saving state is also executed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed up to four times after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes from the second background image to the first background image. Will be updated. After that, as a normal state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening is executed.

On the other hand, if there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory, either the meteor effect (first meteor effect) or the stock effect is performed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period. There are cases where one of them is executed and cases where a meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol whose variable display result is a big hit or a small hit.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, when the meteor effect (first meteor effect) is executed during the 12-second symbol determination period, it extends for 2 seconds from the start timing of the symbol determination period. Along with the meteor effect, the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state and the display of the result screen are executed as in FIG. 10-40.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-42, when the meteor effect (second meteor effect) is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol whose variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, the start timing of the variable display is performed. The meteor effect is executed for 2 seconds from the beginning, and the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state and the display of the result screen are executed as in FIG. 10-40.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when the stock effect is executed during the symbol determination period of 12 seconds, the stock effect is executed for 2 seconds from the timing when the symbol determination period has elapsed 10 seconds. .. When the stock effect is executed, the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state is executed as in FIG. 10-40, while the display of the result screen ends at the timing when the symbol determination period has elapsed 10 seconds. do.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41 to 10-43, when either the meteor effect or the stock effect is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed up to four times after the end of the time saving state. Since it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on either of them, the display of the second background image is maintained as the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-44, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, the variable display result is displayed in the second special symbol hold storage. If there is no hold memory that is a big hit or a small hit, after the 12-second symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol, the 7-second variable display of the 2nd special symbol is 0. It is executed a maximum of 92 times with a symbol confirmation period of 5 seconds in between. Further, during the 12-second symbol confirmation period, the symbol confirmation period effect for continuing the time-saving state is executed for 12 seconds, and the result screen is displayed for 10 seconds from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period. Further, the display of the result screen ends at the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period, and the stock effect is executed for 2 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed seven times in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed, the variable display result is the big hit in the second special figure hold memory. Or, if there is no hold storage that is a small hit, the time saving state continues even in the variable display of the second special symbol after the eighth time, so that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is the second background image. The display of is maintained.

On the other hand, if there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory, either the meteor effect (first meteor effect) or the stock effect is performed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period. One may be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-45, when the meteor effect (first meteor effect) is executed during the 12-second symbol determination period, it extends for 2 seconds from the start timing of the symbol determination period. Along with the meteor effect, the time-saving state continuation symbol determination period effect and the result screen display are executed for 12 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-46, when the stock effect is executed during the 12-second symbol confirmation period, the same as in FIGS. 10-44, 2 seconds from the timing when the symbol determination period has elapsed 10 seconds. Stock production is executed over. When the stock effect is executed, the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state is executed as in FIG. 10-40, while the display of the result screen ends at the timing when the symbol determination period has elapsed 10 seconds. do.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 to 10-46, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed, it is the 8th time in the time saving state. When the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on any of the 12th variable display of the second special symbol, and the 8th to 12th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. Even if it is not controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on, it is almost certainly controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on either of the 99th variable display of the second special symbol at which the time saving control ends. Since there are cases where the image is displayed, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 maintains the display of the second background image.

10-47 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-36. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (098SGS461). Then, based on the specified variable display result and the variable pattern, the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined (098SGS462).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-48 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, and the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%. Decided to execute the notice effect in, 40% decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-2, 15% decided to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-3, 5% The execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 is determined by the ratio of.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach (when the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 49%, and the pattern is at a rate of 30%. Decided to execute the notice effect on YE-1, decided to execute the notice effect on the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and decided to execute the notice effect on the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%. It is decided to execute the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 1%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of normal reach (when the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is decided at a rate of 80%, and the pattern YE- at a rate of 15%. The execution of the notice effect in 1 is decided, the execution of the notice effect in the pattern YE-2 is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 is decided at the rate of 0%, and 0 The execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 is decided at a rate of%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order and the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (non-reach is out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, and the pattern is at a rate of 5%. Decided to execute the notice effect on YE-1, decided to execute the notice effect on the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 0%, and decided to execute the notice effect on the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%. , It is decided to execute the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (B), in the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed as dialogue on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2. Is an effect pattern in which the characters "hot!" Are displayed as lines on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern in which the characters "super hot!" Are displayed on the image display device 5 as lines. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern in which the image of the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the dialogue.

That is, as the advance notice effect in the feature unit 098SG, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 is set to be high, and the image display device 5 is set. In the case where "super hot!" Is displayed as a dialogue, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is set to be high next to the case where the character D is displayed. When "chance!" Is displayed as a dialogue on the image display device 5, the ratio of the most variable display result to a big hit is set to be the lowest (the dialogue and characters displayed on the image display device 5 as a warning effect). Big hit expectation: Character D> "Super hot!"> "Hot!"> "Chance!").

That is, in the advance notice effect of the feature unit 098SG, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot expectation is the highest by displaying the character D on the image display device 5 as in the case of executing the panel display effect. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Returning to FIGS. 10-47, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the process of 098SGS462 (098SGS463). When it is decided to execute the advance notice effect (098SGS463; Y), the effect pattern of the determined advance notice effect is stored (098SGS464), and the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set to end the advance notice effect determination process (098SGS467). ..

The advance notice effect is determined based on the fact that the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer is decremented by -1 each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is out of the timer. The process table for the advance notice effect is selected according to the effect pattern of the advance notice effect, and the process timer for the advance notice effect is started. After that, the value of the advance notice effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the image display device 5 changes according to the content of the process data according to the value of the advance notice effect process timer. A command may be output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the pattern.

10-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect processing shown in FIG. 7. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is operating (098SGS461). When the ending effect process timer is not operating (098SGS461; N), the ending effect process table is selected (098SGS462) and the ending effect process timer is started (098SGS463). Then, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, effect component). The ending effect processing is terminated by controlling the various lamps, the speakers 8L and 8R as the effect components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.).

When the ending effect process timer is in operation (098SGS461; Y), the value of the ending effect process timer is decremented by -1 (098SGS465), and it is determined whether or not the ending effect process timer has timed out. (098SGS466). When the ending effect process timer is timer-out (098SGS466; Y), it is further determined whether or not the ending effect process timer out of the timer is the last ending effect process timer (098SGS467). When the ending effect process timer out of the timer is not the last ending effect process timer (098SGS467; N), the process data is switched (098SGS468). That is, the ending effect process timer is started again by setting the ending effect process timer setting value set next in the ending effect process table to the process timer (098SGS469). In addition, the effect device (effect component) is based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data, input control execution data, etc. included in the process data set next. The control state for is changed (098SGS470), and the process proceeds to 098SGS472.

When the ending effect process timer is not timer-out in 098SGS466 (098SGS466; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the circle-day group effect process timer (098SGS471), and 098SGS472 is used. move on.

In the 098SGS472, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the completed jackpot game is a jackpot A or a jackpot B jackpot game (098SGS472). When the finished jackpot game is a jackpot game of either jackpot C to jackpot E (098SGS472; N), the ending effect processing is finished, and when the finished jackpot game is a jackpot A or jackpot B jackpot game ( 098SGS472; Y) displays a message indicating that the effect mode can be changed in the image display device 5 during the ending effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-50 (A) and 10-50 (B). The effect mode determination process for accepting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A and determining the effect mode from the first mode and the second mode is executed (098SGS473).

When the ending effect process timer out of the timer in 098SGS467 is the last ending effect process timer (098SGS467; Y), it is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process for the effect control process flag. (098SGS474), the ending effect processing is completed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when the feature unit 098SG is controlled to shorten the time after the end of the big hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-51 to 10-59. First, as shown in FIG. 10-51 (A), when the time saving state is controlled after the end of any of the big hit games, if the first mode is selected as the effect mode, the predetermined image display device 5 is set. At the position (upper right part of the image display device 5 in FIG. 10-51 (A)), the player launches the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a hit in the normal drawing and go to the second start winning opening. The display of the first right-handed notification image prompting the player to win the game ball is started. The display of the first right-handed notification image ends when a predetermined period elapses.

It should be noted that the time saving state is the time saving state after the first hit (one of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C after the big hit by the variable display of the first special symbol when the game state is the normal state. In the case of the time saving state after the end), the display of the second background image is started on the image display device 5 when the time saving state is controlled.

Then, when the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit D or the big hit E, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is started as shown in FIGS. 10-51 (B). Then, in the image display device 5, the second right-handed hit that prompts the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal figure hit and to make the second start winning opening win the game ball. The display of the notification image is started. The second right-handed notification image is an image having a size larger than that of the first right-handed notification image, and is displayed at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-51 (C) and 10-51 (D), each of the second special symbols is used as the second panel display effect during the variable display for displaying the second right-handed notification image. The hold display is displayed as any panel of character A to character D.

As shown in FIG. 10-51 (C), when the number of the second special figure reserved storage reaches four, which is the maximum number during the display of the second right-handed notification image, the image display device 5 sets the second. 2 Instead of the right-handed notification image, the player is hit by launching the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal hit and urge the player to win the game ball at the second start winning opening. The display of the notification image is started. The third right-handed notification image is an image having a smaller size than the first right-handed notification image, and is displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-51 (E), when the reach is reached, the reach effect is executed while maintaining the display of the third right-handed notification image on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-51 (D), when the number of the second special figure reserved storage does not reach the maximum number of four during the display of the second right-handed notification image, the image display device 5 The display of the second right-handed notification image is maintained. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-51 (E), when the reach is reached, the image display device 5 replaces the second right-handed notification image with the third, even if the number of the second special figure reserved storage has not reached four. The display of the right-handed notification image is started and the reach effect is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-52 (A) and 10-52 (B), when the time saving state is the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit A, in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. When the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the state where the first right-handed notification image is displayed, the display of the panel display screen is started in the image display device 5 as the first panel display effect. At this time, the first panel displayed as the panel display effect is a character corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-52 (C), when the game ball further wins in the second start winning opening, the display of the character panel corresponding to each reserved storage of the second special symbol is started. At this time, the character (panel) displayed according to each reserved storage of the second special symbol is determined by the ratio shown in FIG. 10-30 (A) regardless of the order of the generated reserved storage. The character (panel) displayed according to each reserved storage of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and may be different depending on the order of the generated reserved storage. For example, the ratio at which the pattern PN-4 is determined as the display pattern of the panel when the fourth reserved storage of the second special symbol is targeted (character D is targeted for the fourth reserved storage of the second special symbol). The rate at which the panel is displayed) is set higher than the rate at which the pattern PN-4 is determined as the display pattern of the panel when the first to third reserved storages of the second special symbol are targeted. This may allow the player to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the fourth variable display of the second special symbol.

Then, when a maximum of five panels are displayed on the image display device 5 by a plurality of game balls winning in the second start winning opening, FIGS. 10-52 (D) to 10-52 (F) show. As described above, the panel display screen and the display of each panel are finished, and the decorative pattern becomes reach. Then, the reach production is started.

In the reach effect, for example, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight is executed. If the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 10-52 (G), it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as a result of the battle effect. To. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a small hit or a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-52 (H), the variable display result is a small hit when the ally character wins the enemy character as a result of the battle effect. It is notified that it is out of order.

As shown in FIG. 10-52 (G), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable display ends, the variable display of the second special symbol for the reserved memory (up to 4 times) is shown in the figure. The reach effect is executed in the same manner as in 10-52 (E) to 10-52 (H).

If the variable display result is a small hit or a big hit in any of the maximum of 5 variable displays of the second special symbol, the game is controlled to be in the big hit game state of either big hit C to big hit E. (If the variable display result is a small hit, the condition is that a V prize is generated during the small hit game).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-53 (A) and 10-53 (B), when the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game state of the big hit B ends, after the big hit game of the big hit B ends. , An operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a hit and to have the game ball win the second start winning opening. To. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started by the game ball winning the second start winning opening, the jackpot A corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed in the image display device 5. The panel of the character D having a size larger than the panel display effect in the time saving state after the big hit game of the jackpot B (the panel corresponding to the character D for the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B) is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-53 (C) and 10-53 (D), when the display of the character D-compatible panel ends after the lapse of a predetermined time, the decorative symbol reaches. After the decorative symbol reaches the reach, the image display device 5 displays the variable display, the variable display based on the first hold storage of the second special symbol, and the second hold of the second special symbol as a success / failure notification effect. The operation promotion image of the push button 31B corresponding to each of the variable display based on the memory is displayed.

When the player operates the push button 31B three times while the operation promotion image of the push button 31B is displayed, the variable display, the variable display based on the first hold memory of the second special symbol, If any of the variable display results of the variable display based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol is out of order, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (E), these three variable times are performed as a result of the success / failure notification effect. Display It is notified that all variable display results are out of order.

At this time, in the image display device 5, the operation of prompting the player to hit the game ball toward the passing gate 41 again to generate a hit with the normal figure and to have the game ball win the second start winning opening. A facilitating image is displayed. Then, after all the three variable displays of the second special symbol controlled in the time saving state are completed, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (F), the game ball wins the second start winning opening. The panel display effect may be executed for the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage of up to four second special symbols that have occurred. As the panel display effect in this case, a panel (for example, a cross mark on the character D) indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the panel of the character D as the first panel has already been completed three times. By displaying the panel (marked with), the player may be made to pay more attention to whether or not the remaining variable display result of the second special figure of the second special figure is a small hit or a big hit.

On the other hand, when the player operates the push button 31B three times while the operation promotion image of the push button 31B shown in FIG. 10-53 (C) is displayed, the variable display, 1 of the second special symbol If the variable display result of either the variable display based on the second reserved memory or the variable display based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol is a small hit or a large hit, it is shown in FIG. 10-53 (G). As a result of the hit / miss notification effect, it is notified that the variable display result is a small hit or a big hit in any of these three variable displays.

Next, it will be described after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E is completed.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (A) and 10-54 (B), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit D, and the second special symbol is displayed. 2 A case where there is no hold storage in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the special figure hold storage will be described. When the 7-time variable display of the second special symbol is completed after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed, the symbol determination period is such that the variable display is not executed for 12 seconds. As shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B) and 10-54 (C), when the symbol determination period is reached, the image display device 5 starts displaying the result screen, and the second special symbol is displayed seven times. Based on the fact that the variable display is completed and the game state is controlled to the normal state, the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state is executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (D) and 10-54 (E), after the effect of the symbol determination period for the end of the time saving state is completed, the second special symbol of the second special symbol generated up to four times during the time saving state is completed. Variable display (variable display of the second special symbol up to four times in the normal state) is executed. During the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times, the display of the result screen and the display of the second background image are continued. Then, the variable display of the second special symbol for the fourth time after the game state is controlled to the normal state is completed (the variable display of the second special symbol for a maximum of 11 times after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed is completed. The display of the result screen on the image display device 5 is completed, and the second background image is updated to the first background image.

Next, the 7th variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit D, and the variable display result is the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol hold storage. Will be described, and a case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit E will be described. As shown in FIGS. 10-55 (A) and 10-55 (B), as in FIGS. 10-54 (A) and 10-54 (B), the second special symbol is in a time-saving state after the big hit game is completed. When the variable display ends, the symbol confirmation period in which the variable display is not executed for 12 seconds is reached, and the display of the result screen is started. Immediately after the start of the symbol confirmation period, a meteor effect in which a shooting star flows in the second background image based on the existence of a holding memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure holding storage ( The first meteor effect) may be executed.

Then, when the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (C), while the time saving state ending symbol determination period effect is executed, the Jintan When the state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (D), the symbol confirmation period effect for continuing the time saving state is executed, and the time saving state is continued for the player. You will be notified to do so.

After the end of these symbol fixing period effects, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (E), the variable display of the second special symbol is performed once to four times (based on the hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit). After the second special symbol variable display) is executed, it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The display of the result screen is executed for a maximum of 21.5 seconds up to 2 seconds after the start of the variable display which is a big hit or a small hit, while the display of the second background image is a big hit or a small hit. It is maintained as it is even after the start of the variable display.

Further, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit D, and the seventh variable display is completed when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is completed. 2 When there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the special figure hold memory, as shown in FIGS. 10-56 (A) to 10-56 (E), the seventh time. 2 After the result screen display and the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state are executed in the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit. A meteor effect (second meteor effect) may be executed from the start.

Further, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of the big hit D, and the seventh variable display is completed when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is completed. 2 When there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the special figure hold memory, as shown in FIGS. 10-57 (A) to 10-57 (E), the seventh time. 2 Variable display in the second special symbol hold storage at the end of the symbol confirmation period after the result screen display and the symbol confirmation period effect for the end of the time saving state are executed in the symbol confirmation period after the variable display of the special symbol is completed. A stock effect may be performed to inform that the result is a big hit or a small hit.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-58 (A) to 10-58 (D), the case where the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed is also performed. , After the display of the result screen and the effect of the symbol confirmation period for continuing the time saving state are executed in the symbol confirmation period after the 7th variable display of the second special symbol is completed, the second special symbol is suspended at the end of the symbol confirmation period. A stock effect may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the memory.

As shown in FIGS. 10-58 (E) and 10-58 (F), the stock effect has a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory. It is feasible both in some cases and in non-existent cases.

That is, as described above, the stock effect executed in the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big hit E functions as an effect of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold storage. In addition to the case of doing so, the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues over a maximum of 92 variable displays (the variable display result will almost certainly be a big hit or a small hit in any of the remaining 92 variable displays). It also functions as a production to notify that.

As described above, in this feature unit 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-59, among the meteor effect, the stock effect, the symbol determination period effect for continuing the time saving state, and the other symbol determination period effects, the jackpot A to the jackpot C In the symbol confirmation period (10 seconds) of the variable display of the end of the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state, only the other symbol confirmation period effects can be executed, and the variable display of the end of the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot D (time reduction state). In the symbol confirmation period (12 seconds) of the 7th second special figure variable display), the meteor effect and the stock effect can be executed, and the 7th second special figure in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed. In the variable display symbol confirmation period (12 seconds), it is possible to execute a meteor effect, a stock effect, and a symbol determination period effect for continuing the time saving state.

Furthermore, the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) of the second special figure variable display four times after the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D, and the eighth time in the time saving state after the big hit game state of the big hit E ends. In the 12th variable display symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds), the meteor effect and other symbol determination period effects can be executed, and in the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) other than the above, other symbols are confirmed. Only the design confirmation period production can be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 098SG, the effect control CPU 120 performs the special effect process as shown in FIGS. 10-33 based on the reception of the symbol confirmation 2 command and the symbol confirmation 3 command from the CPU 103. Since the first meteor effect or the stock effect is executed, even if the symbol confirmation period is 12 seconds in the 7th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed, the jackpot D Since the first meteor effect and the stock effect as the look-ahead notice effect in the present invention are executed from the time when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game is completed, the game during the symbol confirmation period. It can enhance the interest.

In addition, in this feature unit 098SG, if the first meteor effect or the stock effect is executed during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed, it is always necessary. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the variable display based on any of the second special figure holding storage, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special figure holding storage is not limited to this. Even if there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, the first meteor during the 7th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. A case may be provided in which an effect or a stock effect is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 and 10-33, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first meteor effect and the stock effect based on the reception of the symbol confirmation 2 command or the symbol confirmation 3 command from the CPU 103. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the execution control of the first meteor effect and the stock effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect in the present invention.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute any one of the first meteor effect, the second meteor effect, and the stock effect as a special effect in the present invention. Furthermore, as the first meteor effect, the second meteor effect, and the stock effect, the first meteor effect and the stock effect are performed during the 7th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the big hit game is completed. There are cases where it is executed and cases where the second meteor effect is executed in the variable display of the second special symbol in which the 8th to 11th variable display results after the big hit game is a big hit or a small hit. The first meteor effect, the stock effect, and the second meteor effect can be executed at different timings, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the variation patterns are changed between PA3-4 and PB3- in the variable display of the 7th second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot D and the variable display of the 7th second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot E. 3 or PC3-3 can be determined, and when variable display is executed with any of these PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3 fluctuation patterns, a 12-second symbol determination period is provided. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in any of the other fluctuation patterns, a symbol determination period of 10 seconds or 0.5 seconds is provided. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 and 10-38, when the symbol determination period is 12 seconds, if the seventh special symbol is variablely displayed after the jackpot game of jackpot D is completed, the effect control is performed. CPU 120 executes the effect of the symbol determination period for ending the time saving state, and if the second special symbol is variablely displayed for the seventh time after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E, the effect control CPU 120 determines the symbol for continuing the time saving state. Since the period effect is executed, both the variable display of the 7th second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot D and the variable display of the 7th second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot E are performed. Since the variable display is executed in any of the fluctuation patterns of PA3-4, PB3-3, and PC3-3, and the symbol confirmation period of 12 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, the jackpot D It is difficult for the player to recognize whether the time saving state ends or continues when the variable display of the second special symbol ends after the big hit game of the jackpot E ends, and the symbol for ending the time saving state in the symbol confirmation period of 12 seconds. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the fixed period effect or the symbol fixed period effect for continuing the time saving state is executed, the game interest can be improved.

Further, while the first meteor effect and the stock effect can be executed during the 7th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot E jackpot game, the first meteor effect and the stock effect can be executed, while the jackpot D jackpot game ends. In the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state of, when there is a hold memory in the 2nd special symbol hold memory where the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, the 1st meteor effect or stock Since the effect can be executed, whether or not the first meteor effect or stock effect is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E. It is possible to draw the attention of the crab player and improve the game entertainment.

Further, as the right-handed notification effect in the feature unit 098SG, the image display device 5 can display the first right-handed notification image and the third right-handed notification image having a size smaller than that of the first right-handed notification image. ing. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-51, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the first right-handed notification image on the image display device 5 in the seventh variable display after the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E is completed. Then, when the number of the second special figure reserved storage reaches four, the third right-handed notification image is displayed instead of the first right-handed notification image, so that the second special figure reserved storage number is the maximum number of storages. By displaying the first right-handed notification image even though the number has reached four, it is possible to prevent the player from causing a disadvantage such as the player excessively hitting the game ball. Can be done.

In the feature unit 098SG, the image display device 5 can display a third right-handed notification image, which is smaller in size than the first right-handed notification image, as an image having lower visibility than the first right-handed notification image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third right-handed notification image is the first right-handed notification image if the image has lower visibility than the first right-handed notification image. Images may have different color arrangements, display positions, effects displayed together, image display directions, and the like. That is, "low visibility" in the present invention means that the size illustrated in the feature unit 098SG is different, the color scheme is different, the display position is different, and the effects displayed together are different. Some of them have different image display directions.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37, in the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol determination period, the symbol determination period effect for the first hit and the symbol determination period effect for the end of the time saving state are produced according to the variation pattern of the variable display that has ended. Since any of the symbol fixing period effects for continuing the time saving state can be executed, it is possible to give variations to the effects that can be executed during the symbol fixing period, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. In addition, in this feature unit 098SG, the symbol confirmation period effect that can be executed in the symbol determination period according to the variation pattern of the terminated variable display (the symbol determination period effect for the first hit, the symbol determination period effect for the end of the time saving state, Although any of the forms in which the time-saving state continuation symbol fixing period effect) is different, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first hit symbol setting period effect and the time-saving state end symbol determination period effect are not limited to this. , The effect mode of the symbol fixing period effect for continuing the time saving state may be at least a partially different effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13, the CP 103 can determine the symbol determination period from 12 seconds and 10 seconds according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the effect control CPU 120 is determined. Since any of the symbol confirmation period effects can be executed according to the symbol confirmation period, the degree of freedom of the effects that can be executed during the symbol confirmation period can be increased, and the difference between each effect can be easily understood.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37, when the ending fluctuation pattern is PA3-4, the effect control CPU 120 may display the second special symbol for the seventh time after the jackpot game of jackpot D is completed. For example, if the 7th variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game of the big hit E, the time saving state continuation symbol fixing period effect is executed. That is, even if the variable display is executed in the same fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a different symbol confirmation period effect in the symbol determination period according to the jackpot type of the immediately preceding jackpot game. , It is possible to improve the game entertainment of the design confirmation period production. In the feature unit 098SG, a plurality of periods can be set as a variable display symbol determination period while providing a variation pattern as a specific variation pattern in the present invention (PA3-4, PB3-3, PC3-3). Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one variation pattern is provided as the specific variation pattern in the present invention, and only one period can be set as the variable display symbol determination period. May be good. In this case, the effect to be executed within the symbol determination period may be different depending on the timing at which the variable display is executed in the specific fluctuation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-60, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display symbol determination period of 12 seconds, 10 seconds, and 0.5 seconds during the symbol determination period. Since the types of feasible symbol confirmation period effects are different, for example, the same effect as during the 0.5 second symbol confirmation period is executed during the 12 second symbol confirmation period, so that the effect is delayed. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating. It should be noted that the feature unit 098SG exemplifies a form in which the types of the symbol fixing period effects that can be executed differ depending on the symbol fixing period of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any of them. The same symbol fixing period effect may be executed even in the symbol fixing period. Further, in the case where the same symbol fixing period effect is executed in any of the symbol fixing periods, the effect mode and the effect period are different from each other during the symbol confirmation period. The production may be feasible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37, when the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is set after the variable display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state, the symbol confirmation period for the non-time saving state is set. If the effect is executed and the game state is the time-saving state, the time-saving state symbol confirmation period effect is executed. Therefore, the player executes either the non-time-saving state symbol confirmation period effect or the time-saving state symbol confirmation period effect. It is possible to easily recognize the state controlled by the game, and the different symbol confirmation period effects according to the game state are executed in the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the present feature unit 098SG, when a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is set after the variable display of the second special symbol, a mode in which different symbol confirmation period effects can be executed depending on the game state is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds is set after the variable display of the second special symbol, the same symbol confirmation period effect is produced regardless of the gaming state. You may do it. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the load of determining which symbol determination period effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-14, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation 2 command when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is completed in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot D is completed, and the jackpot E is executed. When the 7th variable display of the second special symbol is completed in the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed, the symbol confirmation 3 command is transmitted, so that the effect control CPU 120 ends the jackpot game in which the terminated variable display is the jackpot D. It is easy to determine whether it is the final variable display (7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol) in the later time-saving state or the 7th variable display of the 7th special symbol in the time-saving state after the big hit game of jackpot E is completed. Therefore, the control load in the staging control CPU 120 can be simplified.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 098SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the variable display result is a big hit at a ratio of 1 in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, a pachinko machine capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values having different jackpot probabilities in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention may be applied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, both the warning effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed. When the effect with high expectation of big hit is executed as the advance notice effect, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the effect with low expectation of big hit is executed as the advance notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-60 to 10-65 as a modification 098SG-1, the rear variable as an effect to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (for example, during the reach effect) in the variable display start process. Rear variable to determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect during display The suggestion effect determination process during display and the front variable as an effect to be executed during the first half of the variable display (for example, during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach). The effect control CPU 120 executes the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the display suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-60, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning command buffer 098SG194A and specifies the value of the hold display flag corresponding to the variable display (098SGS501). The hold display flag is a flag for displaying the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage on the image display device 5, and is stored in association with each entry in the start winning command receive command buffer 098SG194A. .. In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the "1-0" entry of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A is specified, and the second variable is performed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 098SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 098SGS301 (098SG502).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-61 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and 0% decided to execute the rear part. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white rectangle or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, 50% of the time it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, 50% of the time it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the time. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 098SGS501 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 098SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold storage display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined.

Also, pay attention to the case where the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold storage display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 098SG of the present embodiment, when the hold storage display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold storage display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-60, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 098SGS502 (098SGS503). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 098SGS502, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the 098SGS502 process, further. , 098SGS502 determines whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (098SGS504).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 098SGS502, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (098SGS505).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the processing of 098SGS505, as shown in FIG. 10-61 (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is a pattern AS-2. It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of 098SGS505, as shown in FIGS. 10-62, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect to the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of 098SGS502, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (098SGS506). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (098SGS507).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in 098SG307, as shown in FIG. 10-61 (B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, the set value 5 is determined by a high ratio when the set value is either 5 or 6. It is said that the expectation that it is 6 is high.

In this modification 098SG-1, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 are set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 are set as high settings. Alternatively, the setting values 1 and 2 may be set to a low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 may be set to an intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 may be set to a high setting to set the execution ratio of the effect pattern.

In the process of 098SGS507 described above, as shown in FIGS. 10-63, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, and pattern at a rate of 0%. Decide on SS-5. If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 9%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 20 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 10%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and 10 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 20%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and 30 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 20%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 It is determined to be pattern SS-3 at a rate of%, it is determined to be pattern SS-4 at a rate of 30%, and it is determined to be pattern SS-5 at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present modification 098SG-1, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the setting is set. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process during front variable display executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process. In the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display shown in FIGS. 10-64, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (098SGS511). Further, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (098SGS512).

If it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, whether or not the front variable display is executed and the suggestion during the front variable display are based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as an effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (098SGS513). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and the rate is 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 70% decides not to execute the front variable display suggestion effect, and 25% decides to execute the character effect as the front variable display suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. When the execution of the suggestion effect is decided and the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (098SGS514). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-64, after the execution of 098SGS513 or 098SGS514, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined (098SGS515). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during variable front display, the suggestion effect determination process during variable front display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during variable front display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (098SGS516).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (098SGS517).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of 098SGS517, a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided as shown in FIG. 10-65 (C). .. Of these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of variable display results to big hits is the lowest by displaying a character A (not shown) on the image display device 5. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of 098SGS517, as shown in FIG. 10-66 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. And decide on pattern CS-2 at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the part is terminated (098SGS518).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 098SGS518, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect patterns CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect is started during the rear variable display is extended for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIG. 10-66 (C)).

Therefore, in the processing of 098SGS518, as shown in FIG. 10-66 (B), when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20% when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for which execution is determined is a setting suggestion effect. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the rate at which the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the modified example 098SG-1 of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed by the pattern TS-2, it is possible to expect the player to execute the setting suggestion effect more than when the timer effect is executed by the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

As described above, in the present modification 098SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the character is used as the suggestion effect during the front variable display. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It is supposed to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 to 10-67, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). The process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start wait timer each time the variable display effect process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, the stock is stocked after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times (during the variable display of the second special symbol of the eleventh time). Although the embodiment is illustrated in which the effect is executed and the player is notified that the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is modified. As Example 098SG-2, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed, for example, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B during the period when the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5 (new start winning prize). As a different effect from the stock effect, it is possible to execute a special notification effect that notifies that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed. May be.

By doing so, when the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is controlled, the same result screen as when controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D is displayed is displayed. During the period, it is notified that the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E is generated according to the occurrence of the start prize of the second special symbol, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, if the game ball does not win the variable winning ball device 6B while the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5, the special notification effect is not executed. That is, since the player can select whether or not to execute the special notification effect, the range of selection of the game can be widened, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 098SG-2, a mode in which both the stock effect and the special notification effect can be executed in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big hit E is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, only the special notification effect of the stock effect and the special notification effect may be executed.

Further, in the present modification 098SG-2, a form is provided in which a special notification effect can be executed in response to a game ball winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B while the result screen is displayed on the image display device 5. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special notification effect may be executed in response to a game ball winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the feature unit 098SG exemplifies a mode in which the stock effect is executed during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is completed, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a modification 098SG-3, after the jackpot game of jackpot E is completed, the stock effect may be executed in a period other than the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special symbol.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-68, when the stock effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol of the 11th time after the big hit game of the big hit E is completed, the time reduction after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. Similar to the state, a 12-second symbol confirmation period is provided after the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol is completed, and a variable display in which the 8th to 10th variable display results of the 2nd special symbol are out of order is displayed for 2 seconds each. Execute over. Then, the result screen is displayed from the start timing of the symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol to the timing when the start 2 seconds of the 11th variable display of the 2nd special symbol elapses, and the result screen is displayed. The stock effect is executed from the display end timing.

By doing so, when the 7th variable display of the second special symbol is completed in the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed, whether or not the stock effect is executed after the display of the result screen is completed is determined. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, in the period from the symbol determination period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol to the 11th variable display of the 2nd special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot D or the jackpot E, the second special symbol is displayed. An example is an example in which one of the 1st meteor effect, the 2nd meteor effect, and the stock effect can be performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot D and the jackpot E after the jackpot game is completed. At least two or more of the first meteor effect, the second meteor effect, and the stock effect during the period from the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol to the 11th variable display of the 2nd special symbol. May be feasible.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-14, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed and the variable display is executed in the normal state, the CPU 103 determines the symbol 1 The embodiment in which the command is transmitted to the staging control board 12 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 098SG-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is completed. The CPU 103 may transmit a symbol confirmation 2 command, a symbol confirmation 3 command, or a dedicated symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 when the variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is completed. .. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 completes the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a matter in the normal state, by receiving these symbol confirmation 2 commands, symbol confirmation 3 commands, and dedicated symbol confirmation commands. Since this can be easily specified, the control executed by the staging control CPU 120 can be simplified.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the second special symbol of the 8th to 11th times (the 1st to 4th times after being controlled to the normal state) after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed, the CPU 120 for effect control determines these symbols 2 Based on the receipt of the command, the symbol confirmation 3 command, and the dedicated symbol confirmation command, it may be determined whether or not to execute the second meteor effect in the next variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the feature unit 098SG decides to execute the second meteor effect (execute the meteor effect during the variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit), the second meteor effect is executed. Although the mode of management by a timer (timer waiting for the start of the second meteor effect) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution target of the second meteor effect is when the execution of the second meteor effect is decided. A counter may be set according to the number of variable display up to the variable display of, and the execution of the second meteor effect may be managed by the value of the counter. The value of the counter is decremented by -1 each time the effect control CPU 120 determines that the symbol determination 1 command has been received, and the value of the counter becomes 0 for effect control. The CPU 120 may execute the second meteor effect during the next variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, when the variable display is completed, the CPU 103 transmits any one of the symbol confirmation 1 command, the symbol confirmation 2 command, and the symbol confirmation 3 command to the effect control board 12 regardless of the variable display result. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol confirmation command transmitted by the CPU 103 when these variable displays are completed is a big hit game state or a small hit game state or a small hit based on the variable display to be executed next time. It may be made different depending on whether or not it is controlled by the winning game state. By doing so, for example, the variable display of the second special symbol of the 8th to 11th times (1st to 4th times after being controlled to the normal state) after the big hit game of the big hit D and the big hit game of the big hit E are performed. In the 8th to 11th variable display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving state after the end, the effect control CPU 120 executes the 2nd meteor effect in the next variable display of the 2nd special symbol based on the received symbol confirmation command. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the effect, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 to determine the execution of the second meteor effect in the special effect process, and the control load of the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

Further, the feature unit 098SG exemplifies a mode in which the panel display effect is executed in a time-saving state after the big hit A or the big hit B is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit A or the big hit is not limited to this. Even when the jackpot D or jackpot E is controlled by the jackpot game via the small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game of B is completed, the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed. You may. When the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E is executed in this way, the panel display effect is started from the last variable display in the time saving state, and the variable display and the game state are started. The panel display effect may be executed over the variable display of the second special symbol up to three times after the is controlled to the normal state. In particular, as the panel display effect, from the last variable display of the time saving state, the panel in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit A is completed in the image display device 5 as in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed. A panel of character D having a size larger than the display effect (a panel corresponding to character D for a time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B) is displayed, and the variable display and the game state are controlled to the normal state before being executed. By executing the pass / fail notification effect for the variable display of the second special symbol three times (holding storage of the three second special symbols), the character D compatible panel is displayed on the image display device 5 as the panel display effect. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit can be further increased.

Further, the feature unit 098SG exemplifies a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of controlling a large hit game state and a small hit game state based on a variable display of a special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be capable of being controlled only in the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display of the special symbol.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

For example, by applying the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIGS. 1 to 9 or the modified example 098SG-1 to the feature unit 098SG, the pachinko gaming machine can be subjected to a meteor effect or a stock effect, and can be subjected to a meteor effect or a stock effect, depending on a set value. The jackpot probability may be changeable. In such a pachinko gaming machine, as a modification 098SG-5, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is a high setting value (for example, 6), the seventh time after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed. Even if there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display of the second special symbol, the meteor effect, stock effect, or these It may be possible to perform an effect similar to a meteor effect or a stock effect. By doing this, if the meteor effect or stock effect is executed during the symbol confirmation period, the variable display result of the second special symbol after that will be a big hit or a small hit (that is, it is high for pachinko gaming machines). It is suggested that the set value is set), so that the player can pay attention to it, so that the game interest can be further improved.

Further, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine whose jackpot probability can be changed according to a set value in this way, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in a specific effect pattern is set in the pachinko gaming machine. It may be made different according to the set value. For example, in the feature unit 098SG, the advance notice effect can be executed during the variable display, and the big hit expectation is highest when the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-4 (FIG. 10-). (Refer to 48), the ratio at which the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4 when the variable display result is out of alignment is increased as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is higher.

By doing so, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the player can pay attention to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the advance notice effect is the pattern YE-4. It is possible to suggest to the player that the high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine even when the variable display result is out of alignment.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, when the variable display of the second special symbol for the seventh time after the jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot E is completed, the content of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A is referred to, and the reference result is obtained. If there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory, the symbol determination period of the 7th variable display of the second special symbol or the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. An example is an example of executing a meteor effect or a stock effect during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the big hit game of the big hit D or the big hit E ends. At the start of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol, the contents of the start winning command buffer 098SG194A are referred to, and as the reference result, the variable display result becomes a big hit or a small hit in the 2nd special symbol hold storage. If there is a hold memory, even if it is notified that there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory during the 7th variable display of the second special symbol. good.

If there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in the second special figure hold memory, the start winning is performed again when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is completed. With reference to the contents of the receive command buffer 098SG194A, it may be determined whether the newly generated second special figure hold storage is the hold storage in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. Then, when the newly generated second special figure hold memory is a hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, it may be decided to execute the meteor effect or the stock effect. The timing of executing the meteor effect or the stock effect may be determined by lottery during the symbol determination period and during the variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, as in the feature unit 098SG.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-40 to 10-46, the execution period of the time saving state continuation symbol fixing period effect and the time saving state ending symbol fixing period effect is set to 12 seconds. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the symbol fixing period effect for continuing the time saving state and the symbol fixing period effect for ending the time saving state may be less than 12 seconds. In particular, when the execution period between the time-saving state continuation symbol confirmation period effect and the time-saving state end symbol confirmation period effect is less than 12 seconds, these time-saving state continuation symbol confirmation periods are set during the 12-second symbol confirmation period. A plurality of start timings may be provided for the effect and the effect for determining the symbol for the end of the time saving state. Further, the symbol is confirmed from each start timing according to which of the symbol confirmation period effect for continuing the time saving state and the symbol confirmation period effect for ending the time saving state is executed during the symbol confirmation period of 12 seconds. The ratio at which the period effect is executed may be different. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the player from which start timing the symbol determination period production is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 098SG exemplifies a mode in which the first meteor effect can be executed during a part of the display period of the result screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first meteor effect is not limited to this. , May be executed during the entire display period of the result screen.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, when the result screen is displayed from the symbol determination period of the 7th variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed, the variable display result of the result screen is a jackpot. Alternatively, an embodiment is exemplified in which the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a small hit is continued until after the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the seventh special second after the big hit game of the big hit D is completed. When the result screen is displayed from the symbol determination period of the variable display of the symbol, the display of the result screen may be ended at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol whose variable display result is a big hit or a small hit.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, the CPU 103 is. Dedicated to the case where the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit D ends and the case where the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit E ends. Although the embodiment in which the symbol confirmation command (symbol confirmation 2 command or symbol confirmation 3 command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is used after the variable display is completed. Dedicated symbol confirmation command according to the symbol confirmation period (for example, if the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation 1 command, if the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds, the 10-second dedicated symbol confirmation command, symbol If the confirmation period is 12 seconds, a symbol confirmation command) dedicated to the 12 seconds may be transmitted to the effect control board 12. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the symbol confirmation period from the received symbol confirmation command, so that it is possible to execute an appropriate symbol confirmation period effect according to the specified symbol confirmation period. can.

Further, in the feature unit 098SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine capable of a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine capable of a predetermined game is at least predetermined. If possible, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used in addition to the pachinko game machine 1.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage,
A game in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of 1 is the same as that of the normal state, and the frequency of establishment of the execution condition of the variable display can be controlled to a special state higher than the normal state . A game control means that can control the progress of the game and transmit information about the game,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled in an advantageous state based on the information received from the game control means.
Equipped with
The game control means is
It is possible to determine whether or not each of the reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is controlled in an advantageous state.
The special state can be controlled over the variable display of the first number of times and the variable display of the second number of times more than the first number of times.
Information that can specify the end of the variable display of the first number of times when the variable display of the first number of times is completed in the special state controlled over the second number of times, and the end of the other variable display. It is possible to send the dedicated variable display end information that is not sent in
The effect executing means is
After receiving the dedicated variable display end information or the final variable display end information that can specify the end of the final variable display in the special state from the game control means, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed .
The pre-reading notice effect is not executed in the first pattern in which the variable display result of the final variable display is displayed and in the display period in which the variable display result of the final variable display is displayed. , A gaming machine characterized in that it can be executed by a second pattern executed in a variable display executed based on a hold storage determined to be controlled in an advantageous state by the gaming control means .

Images